كاميرة

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫‪A‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬

‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ‪.Canon‬‬ ‫ﻧﺸﻜﺮﻙ‬

‫ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ‪EOS REBEL T1i/EOS 500D‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪ CMOS‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ ١٥,١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻟﺞ ‪ DIGIC 4‬ﻭﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪ ٩‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ٣,٤‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪.(Full HD‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﻲ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺸﺎء‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻷﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﻫﺪ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٢٠ ،٢١٩‬ﻭﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣ ،١٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻴﺐ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻀﺎﻳﻘﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻠﺪﻙ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﻷﻱ ﻏﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪ .‬ﺍﻋﻠﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﻈﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﻭ‪ .SDHC‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﺼﻄﻠﺢ "ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ" ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻻ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺷﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E5‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻕ(‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻐﻄﺎء ٍ‬

‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪*LC-E5/LC-E5E‬‬

‫)ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻜﺄﺱ ﻋﻴﻨﻲ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬

‫ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪EW-100DB III‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪IFC-200U‬‬

‫‪EOS DIGITAL‬‬ ‫‪Solution Disk‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ(‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪(AV‬‬ ‫‪AVC-DC400‬‬

‫)‪ (١‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ )ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ(‬ ‫)‪ (٢‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫)‪ (٣‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ )‪ (EOS DIGITAL Solution Disk‬ﻭﺃﺩﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫* ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LC-E5‬ﺃﻭ ‪) .LC-E5E‬ﻳﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ‪ LC-E5E‬ﻣﺰﻭ ًﺩﺍ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺷﺮﺍء ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻻ ﺗﻔﻘﺪ ﺃﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫>‪<6‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪.‬‬

‫>‪<U> <V‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ >‪.<S‬‬

‫>‪<0‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬

‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ٦‬‬ ‫‪ : 8 ،7 ،9 ،0‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﻧﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ٤‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬ ‫* ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫‪3‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪M‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠‬‬

‫)ﺹ **(‬

‫‪ :‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻧﺼﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻤﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬ ‫ﻳُﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪.EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻼﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬ ‫‪٧‬‬ ‫‪٨‬‬ ‫‪٩‬‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫‪١١‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٢٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٣‬‬

‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٧‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٥‬‬

‫‪١٠٥‬‬

‫‪١٢١‬‬ ‫‪١٢٩‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫‪١٤٧‬‬

‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬

‫‪١٦٣‬‬

‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫‪١٨١‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬

‫‪١٩١‬‬

‫‪٥‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﻮﺓ ‪٣ ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ‪٤ ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻮﻝ‪٥ ..................................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ‪١٠ ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٢ ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٤ .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪١٦ ................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪٢٣‬‬

‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٤ .........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٢٦ ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪٢٧ ........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪٢٩ .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪٣٠ ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ‪٣١ ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‪٣٣ ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٥ ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪٣٦ .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪٣٨ ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪٤٠ ...........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪٤٢ .................................................................................... LCD‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫‪٤٣‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪٤٤ ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪٤٦ ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪٤٧ .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪٤٨ .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ‪٤٩ ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ‪٥٠ .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ‪٥١ ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 7‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٥٢ ...................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ‪٥٣ .....................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪٥٦ ..................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٦‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬

‫‪٥٧‬‬

‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٥٨ ........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :Z‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٦٠ ............................................................................................ISO‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪٦٢ ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :E‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٦٤ ....................................................................(AF‬‬ ‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٦٦ ..................................................................... (AF‬‬ ‫‪ :MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪٦٧ .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪٦٨ ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٦٩ ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪٧٠ ...........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٧٣ ...........................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬

‫‪٧٥‬‬

‫‪ :s‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪٧٦ .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :f‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪٧٨ ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪٨٠ ................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪٨١ .................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٨٢ ...................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ q‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪٨٣ ..............................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ Oy‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪٨٤ ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪٨٦ ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٨٨ .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٩١ ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪٩٣ ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪٩٤ .................................................................................. (AE‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪٩٥ .....................................................................................(FE‬‬ ‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪٩٦ ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٩٨ ...................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١٠٠ ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ 0‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٠٢ ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪١٠٤ .................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٧‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬

‫‪٥‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬

‫‪١٠٥‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪١٠٦ .................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٠٨ .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪١١١ .......................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪١١٨ ...................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٦‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫‪١٢١‬‬

‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ‪١٢٢ ................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١٢٣ ......................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٧‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪١٢٩‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪١٣٠ ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪١٣٠ ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١٣٠ ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٣٠ .......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٣١ ...............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٣١ ......................................................................................LCD‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪١٣٢ ..............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪١٣٤ .................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٣٥ ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ‪١٣٦ ......................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ‪١٣٧ ............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪١٣٨ ..........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٣٨ .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٣٩ ........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪١٤٢ .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪١٤٣ ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪١٤٥ .........................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٨‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫‪١٤٧‬‬

‫‪ HI‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٤٨ ................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ u/y‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪١٥٠ ............................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٥١ ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪١٥٢ ..................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٨‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪١٥٤ .................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪١٥٦ .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٥٨ ..................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٥٩ ....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٦١ .................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٩‬‬

‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬

‫‪١٦٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٦٤ .....................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪١٦٦ ........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪١٧١ ...................................................................................................‬‬ ‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪١٧٣ ...................................................................(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ‪١٧٦ ..........................................‬‬ ‫‪ d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪١٧٧ ....................................................................................‬‬

‫‪١٠‬‬

‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫‪١٨١‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪١٨٢ .........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪١٨٤ ......................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪١٩٠ .......................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪١١‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬

‫‪١٩١‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪١٩٢ ..................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‪١٩٣ ..........................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪١٩٤ ...........................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‪١٩٦ .............................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪١٩٨ .............................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪٢٠٠ ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪٢٠٣ ................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ‪٢٠٩ ......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪٢١٠ .......................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪٢١٢ ..........................................................................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ‪٢٢٣ ..............................................................................................................‬‬

‫‪٩‬‬

‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٥ - ٤٣‬‬

‫)ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٨ ،٥٠ ،٤٧‬‬

‫)‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻔﺴﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬

‫‪Í‬ﺹ‬

‫‪ j) ٦٩‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‬

‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺧﻠﻖ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬

‫‪Í‬ﺹ‬

‫‪ s) ٧٦‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪(Shutter‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‬

‫‪Í‬ﺹ‬

‫‪ f) ٧٨‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬

‫‪Í‬ﺹ‬

‫‪) ٨٤‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﺎﻓﺘﺔ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪ D) ٦٢ ،٦٠ ،٤٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٢‬‬

‫)‪ 7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٨١‬‬

‫)ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪ A) ١٠٦‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ(‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪ k) ١٢٢‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‬

‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬

‫‪١٠‬‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪) ٧٣‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬

‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٠‬‬

‫)‪(1 ،83 ،73‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٧٠‬‬

‫)‪(86 ،76‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٦‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٦٥ ،٥٠‬‬

‫)‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(AI Servo‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪٥٦‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٤٨‬‬

‫)‪ H‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬

‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٥٨‬‬

‫)‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬

‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪ L) ١٥٩‬ﺣﺬﻑ(‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪) ١٥٦‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪) ١٣١‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬

‫)‪ x‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‬

‫‪ Í‬ﺹ ‪١٦٣‬‬

‫)ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ(‬

‫‪١١‬‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﻘﻄﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪ .Canon‬ﺟﻔﻒ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻗﻄﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺎء ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺑﻪ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻣﻼﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ( ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻛﺄﻥ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻭﺍﺋﺮ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺧﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻈﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺳﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻌﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻄﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺂﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺂﻛﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺗﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻏﺮﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﺭﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻟﺒﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﺲ ﺑﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻲ ﻣﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﻭﺩﻋﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺗﻜﺎﺛﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﺒﺨﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻭﺟﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﻟﺒﻀﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻛﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ ﻛﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗُﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻔﻬﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺁﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ‬ ‫‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻓﺤﺼﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﺘﻘﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ ‪ ٪ ٩٩٫٩٩‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪ ٠٫٠١‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻼ‪ .‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻫﺞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺔ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﻀﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻟﻪ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻲ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺲ‪ .‬ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺘﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﺒﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻏﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻃﺮﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺧﺪﺵ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬

‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻻ ﻳُﻌﺪ ﻋﻴﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻫﻲ ﺳﺎﺧﻨﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬

‫‪١٤‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٤‬‬

‫‪For EF lens‬‬

‫‪For EF-S lens‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ،EF-S‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<AF‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<1‬ﺹ ‪(٢٧‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٩‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫‪٦‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٤٤‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪٨‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪) <x‬ﺹ ‪.(٥٦‬‬

‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٩‬‬

‫‪١٥‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻗﺴﻢ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )ﺹ ‪(٢٠‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٩/٦٢‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٢٧‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪) EF‬ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪) EF-S‬ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬

‫>‪ <ISO‬ﺯﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٦٠‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫>‪ <6‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٤‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٩٦‬‬ ‫>‪ <V‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ )ﺹ ‪(٤٩‬‬

‫ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٧‬‬

‫ﻗﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪(٢٣‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٩/٦٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٢٤‬‬ ‫>‪ <D‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٢‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٩٤ ،١٠٤‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺳﻚ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٥ ،١٠٤‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻲ‬

‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬

‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪(٨٠‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪(١٩٤‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٧ ،١٦٤ ،١٥٦‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٧‬‬

‫‪١٦‬‬

‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء )ﺹ ‪(٣٦‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٩٥‬‬

‫>‪ <O‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٨٤ ،٨١‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٨‬‬

‫>‪ <I/A‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪/(AE‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)‪ / (FE‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٧١ ،١٥٠ ،١٤٨ ،٩٥ ،٩٤‬‬

‫>‪ <B‬ﺯﺭ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٣٥ ،٤٢‬‬

‫>‪<u/S‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪/(AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٧١/١٥٠/٦٦‬‬

‫>‪ <M‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٥٢‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٣١ ،٣٨‬‬

‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٩٣‬‬

‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬ ‫>‪ <l/A‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٧٨ ،١٦٥ ،١٢٢ ،١٠٦‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ )ﺹ ‪(٣٢‬‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬

‫>‪ <x‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪(٥٦‬‬

‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٢٦‬‬

‫>‪ <0‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﺹ ‪(٣٨‬‬

‫>‪ <L‬ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ )ﺹ ‪(١٥٩‬‬

‫>‪ <S‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ )ﺹ ‪(٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٩۶‬‬ ‫>‪<WB‬‬ ‫>‪ <XA‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٧٣‬‬ ‫>‪ <Q/Yi‬ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ )ﺹ ‪(٦٩ ،٦٨‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬ ‫>‪<ZE‬‬

‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣١‬‬

‫‪١٧‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ c‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٧٥‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٦٠‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٨٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(٨٥‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٨٣‬‬ ‫‪ q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ r‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬ ‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ)ﺹ ‪(٦٩ ،٦٨‬‬ ‫‪ u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‬ ‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪ l‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪(۶۴‬‬ ‫‪ X‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Focus‬‬ ‫‪ Z‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪AI Servo‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪g‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٢٨‬‬ ‫‪zxcn‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٨‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٨٤‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫)‪) (AEB‬ﺹ ‪(٨٦‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٧٣‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٠٢‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٧٠‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪73‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪/‬ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪86‬‬ ‫‪RAW‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪+RAW 1+73‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺟﻴﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٩٦‬‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ W‬ﺿﻮء ﻧﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ E‬ﻇﻞ‬ ‫‪ R‬ﻏﻴﻮﻡ‬ ‫‪ Y‬ﺿﻮء ﺗﻨﺠﺴﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪ U‬ﺿﻮء ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪ I‬ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ O‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ)ﺹ ‪(٩٨‬‬ ‫‪ B‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪< > (AF‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬

‫>‪ <Z‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫>‪ <A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪/(AE‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AEB‬‬

‫>‪ <o‬ﺿﻮء‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻼﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬

‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)‪ (FE‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‬

‫>‪ <0‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫>‪ <A‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬

‫>‪ <e‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫)ﻓﻼﺵ ‪(FP‬‬ ‫>‪ <d‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)‪/(FE‬ﺟﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEB‬‬ ‫>‪ <y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(FuLL‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Err‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ )‪(Card‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FEL) (FE‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ )‪(buSY‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫)‪(D buSY‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪s‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٥٨‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٦‬‬

‫‪f‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٧٨‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٨١‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪: 8‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٨٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪.Shutter‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(٤٤‬‬ ‫‪ :C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٥٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ : 2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٤٧‬‬ ‫‪ :3‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ )ﺹ ‪(٤٨‬‬ ‫‪ : 4‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٤٩‬‬ ‫‪ :5‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٥٠‬‬ ‫‪ : 6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٥١‬‬ ‫‪ :7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(٥٢‬‬

‫‪٢٠‬‬

‫‪ :k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٢١‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬

‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١١٨ ،٦٧‬‬

‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٢١٧‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٥٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫)ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬

‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١١٨ ،٦٧‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٢١٧‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ ٧٢‬ﻣﻠﻢ )ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺯﺭﺍﻉ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ )ﺹ ‪(٣٤‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪(١٣‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪(٣٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٣٣‬‬

‫‪٢١‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ‬

‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E5‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E5‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٤‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺭﺿﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﻄﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪ -‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ‪ -‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻴًﺎ ﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E5E‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E5‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫‪٢٢‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻬﻴﺪﻳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺭ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺮ ﺇﺑﺰﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء ﻭﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﺨﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺑﺰﻳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(١٩٥‬‬

‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬

‫‪٢٣‬‬

‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪LC-E5‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E5‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺮﺩ ﻃﺮﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E5E‬‬

‫‪LC-E5E‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٢٤‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻡ ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺳﺎﻋﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻳﻮﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﻮﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻨﺎﻗﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ ﻭﺳﺘﻔﻘﺪ ﻃﺎﻗﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺟﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺠﻬﺪ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢٤٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻭﻗﺪﺭﺓ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﻮﻻﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻬﺪ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪.LP-E5‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E5‬ﻣُﺼﻤﻤﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬

‫‪٢٥‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E5‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﺭﺍﻉ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻭﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺗﻪ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻜﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٦‬‬

‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢٩‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫>‪<1‬‬ ‫>‪<2‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺮﺽ >‪ .<f‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )ﺹ ‪(٣٧‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ >‪ <2>/<1‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻗﺼﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ .<f‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﺜﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٧‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[Auto power off 5‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٣١‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <2‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ (...‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪[Recording ...‬‬ ‫ٍ‬

‫‪٢٧‬‬

‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻗﺪﺭ ٍ‬

‫‪c‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﺳﺘﻨﻔﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪n‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﺗﺠﺐ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫)ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬

‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫‪٪٥٠‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫***‬

‫***‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫***‬

‫***‬

‫‪ z‬ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E5‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )‪.(CIPA‬‬

‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬

‫‪٢٨‬‬

‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻔﻪ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ )ﻣﻊ ﺧﻔﺾ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠٧‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﻴﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Date/Time‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫]‪.[6‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Date/‬‬ ‫‪) [Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ‪.a‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) .<0‬ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(.b‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٩‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪،[6‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ] ‪) [Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻳﺐ‬ ‫]‪.[6‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Language‬‬ ‫[ )ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ( )ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪.<0‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٣٠‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﻣﻠﺼﻖ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻟﻚ ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻠﻬﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺣﺮﻛﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<1‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ z‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [Release shutter without card 1‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺬﻛﻴﺮﻙ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٠‬‬

‫‪٣١‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪"Recording...‬‬ ‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ (...‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪z‬‬

‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬

‫‪٣٢‬‬

‫ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺒﺮﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻏﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﻀﻪ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪) ٠٠٠١‬ﺹ ‪.(١٣٢‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺗﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺄﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ .(٤٠‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﻏﻄﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء ﺟﺴﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF-S‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF-S‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ EF-S‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ‪ ،EF-S‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF‬ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺃﺯﻝ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﺪﺭ ﻣﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺃﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٣‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻓﻜﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﻤﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻜﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻜﻮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﻷﺻﺤﺎﺏ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪:EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺣﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ‬ ‫‪ ١٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺮﻙ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<LOCK‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺣﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻮ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ ١,٦‬ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٤‬‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪ ١٤٫٩ × ٢٢٫٣‬ﻣﻠﻢ‪×٠٫٨٨/‬‬ ‫‪ × ٠٫٥٩‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫)‪ ٢٤ × ٣٦‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٠٫٩٤ × ١٫٤٢ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ(‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ُﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ،IS‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬ﻛﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ ‪ IS‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ً‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻗﺎﺭﺏ ﻣﺘﺄﺭﺟﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <f‬ﺃﻭ >‪.<g‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺘﺎﻥ ‪ EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬ﻭ‪EF-S18-‬‬ ‫‪ 200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) IS‬ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٥‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻊ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ً‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ ١٠) E‬ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‬

‫‪ .١‬ﻟﻒ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣًﺎ ﺇﺻﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺫﺭﺍﻋﻴﻚ ﻭﻣﺮﻓﻘﻴﻚ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺟﺴﺪﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﺟﻬﻚ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺿﻊ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻗﺪﻣﻴﻚ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٠٥‬‬

‫‪٣٦‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬

‫ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪(0) .‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺗُﻌﺮﻑ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺛﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ً‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣٧‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻭﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ >‪ <S‬ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ <0‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<M‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<0‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ >‪<S‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫* ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫‪ 9‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫‪٣٨‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫‪٥‬‬ ‫‪٦‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪) .‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﺃﻭ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‬

‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﻳﻔﺘﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻖ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٢٠٠‬‬

‫‪٣٩‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [FORMAT‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Format‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪ z‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ <L‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ]‪Low level‬‬ ‫‪) [format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ( >‪ <X‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٠‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ]‪) [Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺖ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٩‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﺘﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Cancel‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء(‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻌﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺗﺪﻣﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤١‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٨ ،١٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﺮﺅﻳﺘﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ LCD‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻴﻨﻚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ z‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ً‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ( ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺭﺗﺪﺍﺋﻚ ﻧﻈﺎﺭﺓ ﺷﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬

‫‪ z‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ .<M‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‬

‫‪ z‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻓﻌﻠﻪ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٩٨‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺭﺩﻳﺌﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻃﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ )ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻤﻨﻄ‬

‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻨﻪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٦‬‬

‫‪٤٣‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‬

‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫‪٤٤‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺩﻓﻌﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٩٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪(.<o‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ (.<o‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻻ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺪ ﺍﻧﺒﺜﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺸﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳُﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻟﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ .(AF‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻓﻌﺎﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٣,١/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦,٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻇﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ ٣,٣/‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺯﻟﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٥‬‬

‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺎ ًﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬

‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﺟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ( ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ"‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ >‪.(<5‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪﻩ )ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻪ ﻭﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪ .‬ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٦‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺭﺯًﺍ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧ ًﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺭﻭﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺧﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﻞء ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،Shutter‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻪ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪) .‬ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣,٤‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٧‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <3‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻻﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﻫﻮًﺍ ﻭﻭﺿﻮﺣًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺴﺎﻋﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ ﺑﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ )ﺹ ‪.(٥١‬‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬

‫‪٤٨‬‬

‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺭﺍﺋﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪<4‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ‬ ‫>‪ ٠,٢٥) <4 0.25m/0.8ft‬ﻡ‪ ٠,٨/‬ﻗﺪﻡ(‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫>‪) <V‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻇﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺳﻴﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤٩‬‬

‫‪ 5‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ – ﺳﻮﺍء ﺃﻛﺎﻥ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻛﻀﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ – ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻃﻔﻼ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <5‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪.<o‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،Shutter‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ )ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣,٤‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٠‬‬

‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫>‪) <6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﺮﻳﺾ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦,٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦٫٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪<1‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫)ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﺒﺎﺗﻪ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥١‬‬

‫‪ 7‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳُﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺒﺮﺯ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻤُﻀﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻤﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪..‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ُﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻼﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻔﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٢‬‬

‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ -‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <C‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ( ‪ -‬ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ >‪ <C‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ CA‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<C‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪(7) .‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺹ ‪.٥٥-٥٤‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣١‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<2‬ﺳﺘﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٣‬‬

‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬

‫)‪(١‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬

‫)‪(٢‬‬ ‫)‪(٣‬‬ ‫)‪(٤‬‬ ‫)‪(٦‬‬

‫)‪(٥‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬

‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪) <a‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <D‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺃﻭ >‪ ) <b‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪) <b‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ" ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٥٢‬‬ ‫)‪ (٢‬ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺑﻬﺘﺎ ًﻧﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ" ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٤٧‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺒﺜﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (٣‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬

‫‪٥٤‬‬

‫‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬

‫)‪ (٤‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪ :٧٣‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫>‪) <P‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫>‪) <Q‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫>‪) <R‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‪ :‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻫﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫>‪) <V‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (٥‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫>‪) <i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣,٤‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫>‪) <Q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‪ :‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ) ( "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ"‬ ‫ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٦٩‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٩٤‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‪:‬‬ ‫>‪) <q‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪:‬‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (١٠‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺃﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Drive mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ (٦‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .٧٢-٧٠‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪ ،<0‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ( ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٥‬‬

‫‪ x‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺷﺮﺡ ﻷﺑﺴﻂ ﻃﺮﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٤٧‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ +‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٥٦‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<x‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<Y‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ )ﺍﻷﻗﺪﻡ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪. <Z‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <d‬ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٩٨‬‬ ‫*‬ ‫*‬

‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <d‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ AE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٥٧‬‬

‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺑﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<d‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ )ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ +‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻃﺎﻟﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﻀﺎﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫‪٥٨‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪ (٦٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ )ﺹ ‪ .(٦٢‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ، <d‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <I‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪) .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ )‪ ،(30" 3.5‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٦٠‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪ .(٦٢‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ )‪ ،(4000 22‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ >‪ <d‬ﻭ >‪) <1‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺩﻳﺌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ ،<d‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺎء )ﺹ ‪.(١٩٨‬‬

‫‪٥٩‬‬

‫‪ :Z‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪N ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء( ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٦١‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(Z>. (9‬‬ ‫]ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ‪) [ISO speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(ISO‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫>‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<6‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪) "AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٦١‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬

‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ(‬

‫‪٢٠٠ - ١٠٠‬‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺸﻤﺴﺔ‬

‫‪٨٠٠ - ٤٠٠‬‬

‫ﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﺒﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﻴﻮﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎء‬

‫‪) H ،٦٤٠٠ - ١٦٠٠‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬

‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ‬

‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٢‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(؛ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫]‪) [Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1: Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ‪) ISO 200 - 3200‬ﺹ ‪.(١٨٦‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﻤﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺠﺒﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ )ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(؛ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪) [expansion‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ (ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1: On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO 6400‬ﻭ"‪"H‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ( )‪) (ISO 12800‬ﺹ ‪.(١٨٤‬‬

‫‪٦٠‬‬

‫‪ :Z‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪NISO‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ "‪) "AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ "‪) "AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪/C/7/6/5/4/3/1‬‬ ‫‪8/f/s/d‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ISO 100 - 1600‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ISO 100‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ISO 400‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ *‪ISO 400‬‬

‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻞء ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ISO 100‬ﺃﻭ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ISO 400 - 1600‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ "‪) "AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ ٨٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .١٦٠٠‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ ISO‬ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ١٢٥‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٦٤٠‬ﻛﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦١‬‬

‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻴﺲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺳﻮﻯ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫>‪ ،<d‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٦٠/١)Shutter‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ٢٠٠/١ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<D‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ <D‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪"DbuSY‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫]‪) [BUSYD‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<D‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬

‫‪٦٢‬‬

‫]ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﺮ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ[‬ ‫‪EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS / EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﻀﺔ‪ ١٨ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ٥٥ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬

‫‪100‬‬

‫‪1 - 3.5 / 3.5 - 12‬‬

‫‪1 - 2.5 / 3.5 - 7.5‬‬

‫‪200‬‬

‫‪1 - 5.5 / 3.5 - 17‬‬

‫‪1 - 3.5 / 3.5 - 11‬‬

‫‪400/AuTO‬‬

‫‪1 - 7.5 / 3.5 - 24‬‬

‫‪1 - 4.5 / 3.5 - 15‬‬

‫‪800‬‬

‫‪1 - 11 / 3.5 - 34‬‬

‫‪1 - 6.5 / 3.5 - 22‬‬

‫‪1600‬‬

‫‪1 - 15 / 3.5 - 49‬‬

‫‪1 - 9.5 / 3.5 - 31‬‬

‫‪3200‬‬

‫‪1 - 21 / 3.5 - 69‬‬

‫‪1 - 13 / 3.5 - 43‬‬

‫‪6400‬‬

‫‪1 - 30 / 3.5 - 97‬‬

‫‪1 - 19 / 3.5 - 61‬‬

‫‪H: 12800‬‬

‫‪1 - 42 / 3.5 - 138‬‬

‫‪1 - 26 / 3.5 - 86‬‬

‫‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،ISO‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺘﺮ‪ 3,3/‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣُﺮﻛﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﺑﻚ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ً‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Red-eye On/‬‬ ‫‪) [Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٣‬‬

‫‪ :E‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N(AF‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<ZE‬‬ ‫]‪ [AF mode‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٨٣‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٤‬‬

‫‪ :E‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N (AF‬‬

‫ﺫﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ" )ﺹ ‪.(١٩٢‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [1 Beep‬ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻳُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪ (٧٣‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻟﻦ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﺑﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Servo‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ AI Focus‬ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ،Servo‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٥‬‬

‫‪ S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N (AF‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻧﺸﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺣﻴﺎﻥ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ >‪) <d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ﻭ>‪ <s‬ﻭ>‪ <f‬ﻭ>‪ ،<a‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(9) .<S‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪،(AF‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٦٦‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<6‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :S‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪N (AF‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻦ ً‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻊ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ؛ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪ f/1.0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،f/2.8‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.AI Servo‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :MF‬ﻓﻮﮐﻮﺱ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪)<MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ً‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ ﻭﻳﻨﻴﺮ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫>‪ <o‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <MF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٧‬‬

‫‪ i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣,٤‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ً‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻃﻔﻠﻚ ﻭﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻳﺮﻛﺾ ﻧﺤﻮﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺗﻌﺒﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻬﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪.<i‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ <i‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<YiQ‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫▪ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫▪ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺳﻴﺘﻄﻠﺐ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫]‪) [High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( )ﺹ ‪(١٨٥‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :٢) [2: Strong‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻘﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﻄﺊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٦٨‬‬

‫‪ j‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<YiQ‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ :Q‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(١٩٤‬‬ ‫‪ :l‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪) N‬ﺹ ‪(١٠٤‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ :q‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﺧﺬﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ )ﺑﺎﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﺮﻉ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪ ،<q‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﺘﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٦‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ،Shutter‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ .(١٩٥‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺷﺎﺭﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪،Shutter‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪ (٤٦‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<YiQ‬‬

‫‪٦٩‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ )‪ ١٥,١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣,٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Quality‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫]ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) [Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ )***‪ (M‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫)****‪ (****x‬ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ]***[ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬

‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬ ‫)ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬

‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ ١٥,١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫)‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬

‫***‬

‫***‬

‫‪73‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫‪74‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬ ‫‪76‬‬ ‫‪86‬‬

‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬

‫‪ ٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫‪JPEG‬‬ ‫)‪ ٨‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬

‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬

‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪73+1‬‬

‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ ٣,٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫)‪ ٣,٧‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬ ‫‪ ١٥,١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫)‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫***‬

‫***‬

‫***‬

‫***‬

‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫***‬

‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫***‬

‫***‬ ‫***‬ ‫***‬

‫***‬

‫***‬

‫***‬

‫***‬

‫***‬

‫***‬

‫***‪***+‬‬

‫***‬

‫***‬

‫* ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺳﻴﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٠‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪Paper‬‬ ‫‪size‬‬ ‫)‪A3 (42x29.7cm/16.5x11.7in.‬‬

‫‪73‬‬ ‫‪83‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪74 1+73‬‬ ‫‪84‬‬

‫‪A4 (29.7x21cm/‬‬ ‫)‪11.7x8.3in.‬‬

‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ )ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ( ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ 73‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪ 83‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﺃﻭ ‪.73+1‬‬

‫‪76‬‬ ‫‪86‬‬

‫‪17.8x12.7cm/7.0x5.0in.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ١٢,٧ × ١٧,٨‬ﺳﻢ‪٥ × ٧/‬‬ ‫‪14.8x10cm/5.8x3.9in.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ١٠ × ١٤,٨‬ﺳﻢ‪٣,٩ × ٥,٨/‬‬

‫ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻕ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 7‬ﻭ‪8‬؟‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 7‬ﺑﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ،8‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻃﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﻋﺪ ًﺩﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻘﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻻ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻞ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ؟‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،٩‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ‪"٩" ٩‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﺗﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻨﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪1‬؟‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺣﻮﻝ ‪"1‬‬ ‫ﻭ"ﺣﻮﻝ ‪ "73+1‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻫﻮ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧١‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 73‬ﺃﻭ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻻ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ .1‬ﻭﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﻬﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪73+1‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ 73+1‬ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ 73‬ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﻭﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻫﻮ ‪ JPG.‬ﻭﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻮ ‪ .(CR2.‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ 73‬ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻻ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪0001 . CR2‬‬

‫‪1 image‬‬

‫‪0001 . JPG‬‬

‫‪73 image‬‬

‫‪File extension‬‬

‫‪File number‬‬

‫ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [7 High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]])‪) [Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [7 High ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( )ﺹ ‪) Standard) (١٨٥‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‪) Low/‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‪) Strong/‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‪/‬‬ ‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(( ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [(C.Fn) Custom Functions‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪) .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻼﺣﻆ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ (.‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺃﻭ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ .RAW‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٢‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<XA‬‬ ‫]‪ [Picture Style‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﻧﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻄﺎ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪) Standard P‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( )‪ :C‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Portrait Q‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( )‪ :C‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺠﺎﻧﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ(‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺭﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( )ﺹ ‪ ،(٨٩‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Landscape R‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( )‪ :C‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺯﺭﻗﺎء ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻀﺮﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪ .‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻬﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<3‬‬

‫‪٧٣‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫‪) Neutral S‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ(‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Faithful U‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ(‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﻔﻀﻠﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٥٢٠٠‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﻭﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Monochrome V‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( )‪ :C‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،1‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻈﻬﺮ >‪ <0‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫‪) 3-User Def. 1 W‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٣-١‬‬ ‫ﻳُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Landscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬ ‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ )ﺹ ‪ .(٨٨‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﻣﻦ ِﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٤‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ ﻭﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﺰﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺑﺘﻜﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ >‪<s‬‬ ‫>‪ <8> <a> <f‬ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪،<8‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ "ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ"‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻃﺮﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <d‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪.٣‬‬

‫‪ c‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ >‪ - <c‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ Shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ -‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<6‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٥‬‬

‫‪ :s‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <s‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ (Shutter‬ﺑﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <s‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﺮ‬ ‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬

‫ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫)ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<s‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ" ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.Shutter‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻛﺴﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺳﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ "‪ "0"5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠,٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭ"‪ "15‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٥‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٦‬‬

‫‪ :s‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻤﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ٤٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻃﻔﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻳﺮﻛﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺿﻔﺎء ﺍﻹﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ٢٥٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺧﻠﻖ ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻧﻬﺮ ﻣﺘﺪﻓﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺎﻓﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١٥/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ Shutter‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺃﻗﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٧‬‬

‫‪ :f‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <f‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺰ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬

‫ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<f‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ ،(f‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ ،(f‬ﻗﻠﺖ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ "‪ "00‬ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٧٨‬‬

‫‪ :f‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻬﺘﺰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺹ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ .Shutter‬ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺃﻣﺴﻚ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻧﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ ﺃﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺧﻠﻒ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﺖ ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻤﻴﺰ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﺿﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺿﺎﻕ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،Shutter‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯﺕ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪"30" Shutter‬‬ ‫)‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ٤٠٠٠/١) "4000" Shutter‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬

‫‪٧٩‬‬

‫‪ :f‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪٢٠٠/١‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪ ٣٠ -‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ )ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻜﻬﺎ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ؛ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪[7 Custom Functions(C.Fn‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Flash sync. speed in Av mode‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (Av‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ :١) [1: 1/200-1/60 sec. auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦٠/١-٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫])‪ ٢٠٠/١ :٢) [2: 1/200 sec. (fixed‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(( )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٤‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪N‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻮﻟﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬

‫‪٨٠‬‬

‫‪ :a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻳُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <a‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫>‪<6‬‬ ‫>‪<O> + <6‬‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<a‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ،Shutter‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<6‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻄﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<6‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٢±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ >‪) <BULB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﺎ ﺩﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪ .Shutter‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻟﻌﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺯﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻮﺷﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺸﻨﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺤﺒﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Long exp. noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ( ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪:١) [1: Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪:٢) [2: On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٥‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺹ ‪(194‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٦‬‬

‫‪٨١‬‬

‫‪ :8‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻡ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ >‪ <8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<8‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪(0‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻣﻀﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺫﺍﺕ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺑﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ "‪ ،"٣٠‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻗﺎﺗﻢ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻟﻐﺔ "‪ ،"٤٠٠٠‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻼ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺃﺭﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺇﻻ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺳﺘﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫>‪ <d‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫‪٨٢‬‬

‫‪ q‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤ ٍﻮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﻋﺎﺩ ًﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Metering mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Metering‬‬ ‫‪) [mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪ q‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤُﻀﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻔﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ r‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺠﺰء ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ e‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻣﻴﻦ‪.‬‬

‫‪٨٣‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪ O‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪.(<a‬‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬

‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪) .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪) .‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﻜﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ <O‬ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ‬

‫‪٨٤‬‬

‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫‪ y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺤﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Flash control‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash exp. comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash exp. comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬ﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪) .<Z‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪) .<Y‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ(‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <y‬ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫>‪ <y‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٤‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Auto‬‬ ‫‪) [Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٨٦‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪[3: Disable‬‬ ‫)‪ :٣‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻐﺎﺅﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٥‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [2 Expo. comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( )ﺹ ‪.(٩٥‬‬

‫‪٨٥‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪N‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻌﺰﻳﺰ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Expo. comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Expo. comp./‬‬ ‫‪) [AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬

‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٨٦‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪N‬‬

‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ‪ ٢‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪ <2‬ﻭﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ )ﺹ ‪ (٦٨‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ >‪ <u‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻷﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺛﻢ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ )>‪ <Q‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،(<l‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺛﻼﺙ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ ،<q‬ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺿﻌﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ )ﺹ ‪.(٥٥‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٨٦‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪[3: Disable‬‬ ‫)‪ :٣‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٨٧‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪[Sharpness‬‬ ‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﺪﺓ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Picture Style‬‬ ‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Picture Style‬‬ ‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪.<B‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) Detail set.‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪Picture Style‬‬ ‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫‪٨٨‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪) Sharpness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ(‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ .E‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،E‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ‪ .F‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،F‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪) Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺯﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،G‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﺪﺍﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،H‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Saturation‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،G‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺧﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،H‬ﻛﺎﻧﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﺩﻛﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪،G‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺣﻤﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺐ‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺮﺍﺏ ﻣﻦ ‪،H‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Default set.‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٣‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪) <C‬ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٨٩‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Filter effect‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ( ﻭ]‪[Toning effect‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻭ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬

‫‪ k‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺳﺤﺐ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺠﺎﺭ ﺧﻀﺮﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‬

‫ﻋﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫‪) None :N‬ﺑﻼ(‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪Yellow :Ye‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬

‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬

‫‪Orange :Or‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬

‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻭﺏ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻬﺎﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬

‫‪Red :R‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬

‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻗﺎﺗﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻗﻄﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬

‫‪Green :G‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬

‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻭﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﺠﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬

‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬

‫‪ l‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪) [N:None] :‬ﺑﻼ(‬ ‫]‪) [S:Sepia‬ﺑﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻛﻦ( ]‪) [B:Blue‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬ ‫]‪) [P:Purple‬ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ]‪) [G:Green‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٩٠‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ]‪) [Portrait‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬ ‫]‪) [Landscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫]‪) [User Def. 1‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [User Def. 2‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪ (٢‬ﺃﻭ ]‪[User Def. 3‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪.(٣‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Picture Style‬‬ ‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) .Detail set‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩١‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫‪٥‬‬

‫‪٦‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻟﻴﻜﻦ ]‪) [Sharpness‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻏﺒﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ"‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪.١٠٢-٩٩‬‬

‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ‬ ‫]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻪ )ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻭﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *( ‪-‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٧٣‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]* ‪) [User Def.‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ *(‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩٢‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪N‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻹﻧﺸﺎء‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ‪ .Adobe RGB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪.sRGB‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ sRGB‬ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Color space‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪ [sRGB‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Adobe RGB‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ‪Adobe RGB‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،Adobe RGB ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺍﻳﺔ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.(Exif 2.21) ٢٫٠‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﻟﻄﻴﻔﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ sRGB‬ﺑﺒﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،(Exif 2.21) ٢٫٠‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺴﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑـ "_‪"_MG‬‬ ‫)ﺃﻭﻝ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ "_"(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ .ICC‬ﺗﻢ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ ICC‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩٣‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪N‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ"‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(0) .<A‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <A‬ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<A‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٨٩‬‬ ‫‪*q‬‬

‫‪erw‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(٦٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩٤‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪N‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (AE‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻣﻦ ‪.Canon‬‬ ‫* ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ‪ FE‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <D‬ﻹﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<D‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪(8) .<A‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴُﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﻀﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺧﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪ "FEL‬ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﻴﺊ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<d‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<A‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ .<D‬ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٤‬‬

‫‪٩٥‬‬

‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ (WB‬ﻓﻲ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﺿﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ >‪) <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪ ،<Q‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻮﺯﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪ <Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<WB‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ "‪ ***K) "Approx. ****K‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ(‬ ‫)‪ : K‬ﻛﻠﻔﻦ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫>‪ <U> <Y> <R> <E> <W‬ﺗﻤﺜﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‬

‫‪ O‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺧﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬

‫‪٩٦‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻸ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬

‫‪ :B‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪N‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Custom WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Custom WB‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<WB‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ <O‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Monochrome‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪ ،(٧٤‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻀﺎء‪ ،‬ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪) ٪١٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ( ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ >‪ <O‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪،٣‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩٧‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺗﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺫﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻳﻦ ﺍﻋﺘﺎﺩﻭﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺮﺷﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪WB SHIFT/‬‬ ‫‪) [BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪/‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﺫﺝ ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪A2, G1 :‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " " ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ "‪"SHIFT‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <2‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ‪ Mired‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ :Mired) .‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪.‬‬

‫‪٩٨‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪ .(WB-BKT‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣±‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬

‫‪ ٣±‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻻﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ؛‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ،<6‬ﺳﺘﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ " " ﺍﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬ ‫" )‪ ٣‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ "‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻩ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫"‪ "BKT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﻛﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [WB SHIFT/BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .١ :‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .٢ ،‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ )‪ (B‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ )‪ (A‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ‪ .١‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ .٢ ،‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪(M‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .٣ ،‬ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ )‪ (G‬ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻳﻘﻞ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺛﻠﺚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺛﻼﺙ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ "‪ "BKT‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٩٩‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﺭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺘﺎﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ ،JPEG‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ ،RAW‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Peripheral illumin. correct.‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Peripheral‬‬ ‫‪) [illumin. correct.‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬

‫‪١٠٠‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction data‬‬ ‫‪) [available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ( ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪Correction data not‬‬ ‫‪) [available‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ "ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ" ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Enable‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺼﻠﺢ ﻟﺤﻮﺍﻟﻲ *** ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻷﻳﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪.EOS Utility‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Correction data available‬ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻬﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻘﻞ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠١‬‬

‫‪ 0‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )‪.(7‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ )ﺹ ‪ (٦٨‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(٧٠‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺻﻒ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Assign SET button‬ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) (SET‬ﺹ ‪ (١٨٨‬ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪7 Custom‬‬ ‫)‪) [Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ]‪[0: Quick Control screen‬‬ ‫)ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠٢‬‬

‫‪ 0‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) ISO‬ﺹ ‪(٦٠‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )ﺹ ‪(٧٨‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ* )ﺹ ‪(١٨٦‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪) Shutter‬ﺹ ‪(٧٦‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٨٥‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( )ﺹ ‪(٨٦‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٨٣‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* )ﺹ ‪(٢٠‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٦٨‬‬

‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪(٧٠‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )ﺹ ‪(٩٦‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(٧٣‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪) (AF‬ﺹ ‪(٦٤‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

‫‪Ð‬‬

‫>‪<0‬‬

‫ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪ .<0‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺣﻴﻨﺌ ٍﺬ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮﺓ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﻳُﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠٣‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪N‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺎﻧﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻋﻦ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺮﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺇﺟﺮﺍ ًء ً‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Mirror lockup‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ( ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]‪) [(C.Fn) 7 Custom Functions‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻭﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[1: Enable‬‬ ‫)‪ :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٧‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﺭﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﺄﺭﺟﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ >‪ <l‬ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺛﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﺮﻭﺭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪،RC-5‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺜﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ،RC-1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺮﻕ ﻭﺗﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ‪.Shutter‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪ +‬ﺯﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺮﻛﺖ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ .Shutter‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﺯﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﻤﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﺰﺭ ‪) Shutter‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ >‪) <i‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠٤‬‬

‫‪٥‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺮﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ "ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻣﺴﻜﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻴﺪﻳﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻫﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠٥‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ‪N‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫‪١٠٦‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<6‬‬ ‫ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺭﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪.٪١٠٠‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪.(١١٨-١١١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ‪N‬‬

‫ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ]‪[6 Live View function settings‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪Live‬‬ ‫‪) [View shoot.‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ]ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ[‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻓﻼﺵ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪٪٥٠‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٧٣ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫***‬

‫***‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫***‬

‫***‬

‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E5‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ‪ CIPA‬ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺍﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﻣﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E5‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺘﻲ ‪.١٢٧-١٢٦‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺃﺧﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴُﺼﺪﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪.Shutter‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ y‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 3200‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠٧‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[6‬ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪Live‬‬ ‫‪) [View function settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ( ﻭ]‪) [Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫ﻭ]‪) [Metering timer‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ( ﻭ]‪AF‬‬ ‫‪) [mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬

‫‪) Grid display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Grid 1l‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Grid 2m‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،(٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Metering timer‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (١١٤‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (١١٦‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪١٠٨‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<f‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪N‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻﻳﺰﺍﻝ ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ >‪ <M‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫>‪ .<x‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [2 Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ( ﺃﻭ ]‪6Sensor‬‬ ‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [7 Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺃﻭ ]‪7 Firmware‬‬ ‫‪) [Ver.‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫]‪) [Shutter/AE lock button‬ﺯﺭ ‪/Shutter‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٨٨‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪ :١) [1: AE lock/AF‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻼ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪.<d‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ >‪<8‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [5 Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ .(١٣١‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫]‪) [5 Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٧-١٥٦‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ )ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (١٩٤‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٠٩‬‬

‫‪ A‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪N‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫▪ ‪ :d‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬ ‫▪ ‪:c‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬ ‫▪ ‪ :f‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬

‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ /‬ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪ <g‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ >‪ ،<g‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ >‪ <g‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫)ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﻚ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٠‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ( ﻭ‬ ‫]‪) [u Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ( )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (١١٢‬ﻭ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ( )ﺹ ‪.(١١٦‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺩﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٨‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ]‪[6 Live View function settings‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[AF mode‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ (AF‬ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪) Live Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ(‪d :‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻗ ًﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺼﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺴﻢ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ > < ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬

‫‪١١١‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ Shutter‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬

‫‪) u Live Mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ((‪c :‬‬ ‫ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺟﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪١١٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪<p‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<q‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪<q‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻄﻰ ﺑﺎﻹﻃﺎﺭ >‪.<p‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ > < ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ Shutter‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<f‬ﻓﺄﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ >‪.<p‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﻳﺔ ﻛﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﺮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺳﺎﻃﻌًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺗﻤًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺋﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﺮﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺨﻔﻴًﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <p‬ﺟﺰءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<L‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ )ﺹ ‪.(١١٤‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ .(AF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <L‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪) u‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <p‬ﺑﻠﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ، <A‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ > < ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٣‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ‪) u‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺯﻣ ًﻨﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﺑﻌﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ .(AF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ‪ ،u‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ‪) u‬ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ(؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺛﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪.(AF‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RS-60E3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٤‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺻﻌﺒﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﻁ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﻧﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﺿﺎءﺗﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻗﻮﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻭﺑﻌﻴﺪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﻴﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻘﺎء ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺒﺘﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٥‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪f :‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٦٤‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻛﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ،(AF‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪١١٦‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺠﻌﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪N‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<A‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ Shutter‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RS-60E3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٧‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻴﺜﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬

‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪،<u‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬

‫‪١١٨‬‬

‫‪٥‬‬

‫‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ <u‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ Shutter‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٦‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻜﺲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻌﻠﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﺤﻈﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ .LCD‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [6 LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻃﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻭﺯﺍ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻌﻠﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪<E‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪) <E‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺛﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻇﻬﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ >‪ <E‬ﻭﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪١١٩‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻧﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﻟﻌﺪﺓ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻗﺒﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺸﻮﺵ )ﺃﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﻣﻀﻴﺌﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻓﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7 Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫]‪) [Auto Lighting Optimizer‬ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺹ ‪ (١٨٦‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫]‪ :٣) [3: Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ (FE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٢٠‬‬

‫‪٦‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <k‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫‪.MOV‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ‪ SD‬ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫" ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪" ٦‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ SD‬ﻣﻦ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ ‪Full HD 1080‬‬ ‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ ‪ Full HD 1080‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ ١٠٨٠‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ )ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ(‬

‫‪١٢١‬‬

‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٧-١٥٦‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<k‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺗﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺳﺘُﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪.(١١٨-١١١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <A‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ "‪ "o‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺘﻲ ‪.١٢٨–١٢٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺘﻲ ‪ ١١٩‬ﻭ‪ ١٢٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<Z‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪،(AE‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<S‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪ (١٢٦‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E5‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ :‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬

‫‪١٢٢‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪.[k‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫]‪ : [١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪.(Full HD‬‬ ‫]‪ : [٧٢٠×١٢٨٠‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪.(HD‬‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻫﻮ ‪.٣:٤‬‬ ‫]‪[٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ‬

‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬

‫]‪[١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬‬

‫*** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬

‫*** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ *** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬

‫***ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬

‫]‪[٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬‬

‫*** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬

‫*** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ *** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬

‫***ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬

‫]‪[٦٤٠x٤٨٠‬‬

‫‪ ٢٤‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﻪ‬

‫*** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ *** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬

‫***ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬

‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ ،[١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ً ٢٠‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬ﻭ]‪ ،[٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ً ٣٠‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺎﻧﺒﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ٢ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫]‪ [١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬ﻭ‪ ١‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ [٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬ﻭ‪ ٣٠٠٠٠٠‬ﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫]‪.[٤٨٠x٦٤٠‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪ .١١٧-١١١‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫]‪) [Live mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [uLive mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ( ﺃﻭ ]‪Quick‬‬ ‫‪) [mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٢٣‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Grid 1l‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ (١‬ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Grid 2m‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ ،(٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻜﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<Z‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ (.‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RC-1/RC-5‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺹ ‪ (١٩٤‬ﻟﺒﺪء‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ،RC-1‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <٢‬ﺗﺄﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <o‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻭﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪١٢٤‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ >‪ ،<f‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <O‬ﻭﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ،<6‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺍﺣ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪.(a‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﻉ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﻔﺎﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ )ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫‪١٢٥‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫• ‪ :d‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬ ‫• ‪ :c‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬ ‫• ‪ :f‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺎﻛﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫< ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻗﺮﻳﺐ ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ >‬ ‫<‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ >‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٢٦‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪ ،[١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ً‬ ‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺘﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) .<A‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺣﺘﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤُﺮﻛﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻜﻦ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )‪ (IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻟﺤﻈﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Quick mode‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮﺍ ﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﻛﻔﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٦‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺧﻤﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ‬ ‫{ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﻀﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻴﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺩ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻈﻬﻮﺭ(‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٣‬‬

‫‪١٢٧‬‬

‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫>‪) <E‬ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <E‬ﻭﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﻌﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺗﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) HDMI‬ﺹ ‪ (١٥٧‬ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ‬ ‫]‪ [١٠٨٠x١٩٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[٧٢٠x١٢٨٠‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺮﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٧-١٥٦‬ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ ﺻﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺮﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٢٨‬‬

‫‪٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣١‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪(١٣١‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٢‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٤‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٥‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٦‬‬ ‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٧‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٢‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٣‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٥‬‬

‫‪١٢٩‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻛﺘﻢ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Beep‬ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Release shutter‬‬ ‫‪) [without card‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ Shutter‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ ،Shutter‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "Card‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪.Shutter‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Hold‬ﺇﺑﻘﺎء(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﺪﺓ ]‪) [Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Review time‬ﻣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪١٣٠‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻧﻘﻀﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫>‪ <0> <x> <B> <M‬ﻭﻏﻴﺮﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<B‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﻭﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto power off‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[LCD brightness‬‬ ‫)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪<U‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻭﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣١‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻃﺮﻕ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺑﻜﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪.IMG_0001.JPG‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[File numbering‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫]‪) [Continuous‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‪ :‬ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .٩٩٩٩‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻭ‪ ٩٩٩٩‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻗﻴﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ً‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪Card-1‬‬

‫‪Card-2‬‬

‫‪0051‬‬

‫‪0052‬‬

‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﻠﺴﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫‪١٣٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫]‪) [Auto reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ .٠٠٠١‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﻳﻠﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ ،٠٠٠١‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻬﻴﺄﺓ ً‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪Card-1‬‬

‫‪Card-2‬‬

‫‪0051‬‬

‫‪0001‬‬

‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫]‪) [Manual reset‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ :‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻣﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ ٠٠٠١‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪.٠٠٠١‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻼﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﻣﺲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺻﻞ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٩٩٩٩‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻻﺗﺰﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ ،RAW‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺑـ "_‪ ."IMG‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑـ "_‪ ."MVI‬ﻭﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻫﻮ "‪ ".JPG‬ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ‪ RAW‬ﻫﻮ "‪ ".CR2‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻫﻮ "‪.".MOV‬‬

‫‪١٣٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Auto rotate‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻟﻺﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫]‪) [OnPD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ : (PD‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [OnD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(D‬‬

‫‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬

‫‪ :‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﻃﻼﻕ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﺳﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [OnPD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،(PD‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٥١‬‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﻳﺪ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[OnD‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.(D‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [OnPD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ (PD‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣٤‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪ B‬ﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<B‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ )ﺹ ‪(٩٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪) (WB‬ﺹ ‪/(٩٨‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ )‪) (WB‬ﺹ ‪(٩٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٠٥‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء )ﺹ ‪(٦٣‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٤‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٨‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺹ ‪(٢٩‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٣٠‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺹ ‪(١٣١‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٤٢‬‬

‫‪١٣٥‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪N‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <d‬ﻭﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Clear settings‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ])‪) [Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Clear all camera settings‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪) AF mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫‪) AF point selection‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬

‫‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫‪) Automatic selection‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬

‫‪) Metering mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬

‫‪) q‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‬

‫‪) ISO speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO‬‬ ‫‪) Drive mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ(‬ ‫‪Exposure compensation‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪AEB/‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬

‫‪) AUTO‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪) u‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ(‬ ‫‪) Canceled‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء(‬

‫‪Flash exposure compensation‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾﺩﺭﺟﺔﺇﺿﺎءﺓﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬

‫‪) ٠‬ﺻﻔﺮ(‬

‫‪) Live View shooting‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ(‬

‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬

‫‪١٣٦‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪) Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬

‫‪73‬‬

‫‪) Picture Style‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬

‫‪) Standard‬ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬

‫‪) Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬ ‫‪) White balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬ ‫‪) WB correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬ ‫‪) WB-BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬

‫‪sRGB‬‬ ‫‪) Q‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪) Canceled‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء(‬ ‫‪) Canceled‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻹﻟﻐﺎء(‬

‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪/‬‬ ‫‪Correction data Peripheral illumination‬‬ ‫‪) correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ( ‪) retained‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ(‬ ‫‪) File numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬

‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ(‬

‫‪) Auto cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬

‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬

‫‪) Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‬

‫‪) Erased‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫‪Auto power off‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬

‫‪ ٣٠) 30 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬

‫‪) Beep‬ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ( ‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪Release shutter‬‬ ‫‪) without card‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬ ‫‪ Shutter‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬ ‫‪Review time‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‬ ‫‪Image jump w/6‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(w/ 6‬‬ ‫‪Auto rotate‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪LCD brightness‬‬ ‫)ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬

‫‪) 2 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ(‬ ‫‪ ١٠) 10 images‬ﺻﻮﺭ(‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪Movie-recording size‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫‪AF mode‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫‪Sound recording‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪Grid display‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬ ‫‪Metering timer‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬ ‫‪Remote control‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‬

‫‪٧٢٠×١٢٨٠‬‬ ‫‪Live mode‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ(‬ ‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫‪ ١٦) 16 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬

‫‪OnzD‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(zD‬‬

‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) EOS Utility‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ‪ Exif‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <M‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫]‪) [Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫]‪) [Delete copyright information‬ﺣﺬﻑ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪Clear‬‬ ‫‪) [settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣٧‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺳﻬﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻣﻨﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻴﻨﺎﻙ ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [LCD auto off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪LCD auto‬‬ ‫‪) [off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Screen color‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[5‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Screen color‬‬ ‫)ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣٨‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]*** ‪) [External flash‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ***( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻼ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻤﺎﺛ ً‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Flash control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[1‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Flash control‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫]‪) [Flash firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Enable‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻻ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺮﺯ ﻓﺎﺋﺪﺓ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪.(AF‬‬

‫]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬ ‫ﻭ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ]‪Built-in flash func.‬‬ ‫‪) [setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ﻭ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﺳﺘﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪External flash func.‬‬ ‫‪) [setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ( ﺃﻭ ]‪External flash‬‬ ‫‪) [func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺔ )ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﻌﻠﺔ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١٣٩‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬

‫ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ]‪) [Built-in flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬ ‫ﻭ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪) Flash mode‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫‪) .Shutter sync‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪(Shutter‬‬ ‫‪) FEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(*‬ ‫‪Flash exposure compensation‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫‪E-TTL II‬‬ ‫‪) Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ(*‬ ‫‪) Wireless setting‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ(*‬

‫]‪External flash‬‬ ‫‪[func. setting‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‬ ‫‪k‬‬

‫]‪Built-in flash‬‬ ‫‪[func. setting‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ(‬ ‫ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪E-TTL II‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫–‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪١٤٠‬‬ ‫‪١٤٠‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫‪٨٥‬‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬

‫‪١٤١‬‬ ‫–‬ ‫–‬

‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ]‪) [FEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪) [Zoom‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ( ﻭ]‪[Wireless set.‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻜﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻓﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ]‪) [Manual flash‬ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ( ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﻨﻔﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [1st curtain‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ( ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [2nd curtain‬ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻗﺘﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﺃﺛﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻛﺎﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺎﺑﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻴﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻟﻴﻼ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻓﻼﺷﺎﻥ؛ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻭﻣﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Hi-speed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ(‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ‪.Speedlite‬‬

‫‪١٤٠‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪N‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "‪ y‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ" ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٨٥‬‬ ‫‪E-TTL II‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Evaluative‬ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Average‬ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺲ ﺑﺄﻛﻤﻠﻪ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳًﺎ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﺮﻓﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻭﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[External flash C.Fn setting‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ‬ ‫]‪) [Clear ext. flash C.Fn set.‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.١‬‬

‫‪١٤١‬‬

‫‪ f‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <1‬ﺃﻭ >‪ ،<2‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Sensor‬‬ ‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ ‪.(f‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ‪ (f‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻔﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ،Shutter‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻀﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ]‪) [Clean nowf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻵﻥ( ﻣ ً‬ ‫ُﻌﻄﻼ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto cleaningf‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻵﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ >‪.<2‬‬

‫‪١٤٢‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺰﻳﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺫﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺭﺅﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫‪) Digital Photo Professional‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻟﺼﺎ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺧﻼﻓﻪ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺣﻀﺮ ﺟﺴﻤًﺎ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ )∞(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻣُﺪﺭﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺃﺩﺭ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Dust Delete Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Dust Delete‬‬ ‫‪) [Data‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪.<0‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺕ ‪ ،Shutter‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٤٣‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪N‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺳﻢ ‪ ٣٠ -‬ﺳﻢ ‪ ٠,٧ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ ‪ ١ -‬ﻗﺪﻡ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﻸ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺠﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻻ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺷﻜﻼ ﻣﻌﻴ ًﻨﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﻟﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫)‪ (AE‬ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.f/22‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺨﺒﺮﻙ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ" ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭ‪ RAW‬ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﻬﻮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺩ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ ﺧﺎﻟﺺ ﻛﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٤٤‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍء ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺷﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻮﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ [6‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Sensor‬‬ ‫‪) [cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫‪.Shutter‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬

‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E5‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ،AA/LR6‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٤٥‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪N‬‬

‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺳﻄﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻴﻄﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻷﻥ ﻓﺮﺷﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺪﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﻫﻮﺍء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ﻃﺮﻑ ﻣﻨﻔﺎﺥ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺧﻠﻒ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻠﻒ ﺳﺘﺎﺋﺮ ‪ Shutter‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﻗﻮﺓ ﻧﻔﺦ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﺗﻼﻑ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺠﻤﺪ ﺭﺫﺍﺫ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٤٦‬‬

‫‪٨‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ‪" ٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻭﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ" ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻨﺎﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ .‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻌﺮﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳُﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤُﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻣﻠﻔﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٤٧‬‬

‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ H‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<x‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<I‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪Î‬‬

‫‪Î‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪١٤٨‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ >‪ <6‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫)‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ → ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ → ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬

‫‪ x‬ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫‪ I‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[4Image jump w/6‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪،(6‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪[1 image/10 images/100 images/‬‬ ‫]‪) Date/Movies/Stills‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪/‬‬ ‫‪ ١٠‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ١٠٠/‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ‪/‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫>‪.<6‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫>‪.<W‬‬

‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫>‪ <6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Movies‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ( ﻭ]‪) [Stills‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺇﺣﺪﺍﻫﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٤٩‬‬

‫‪ u/y‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١,٥‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ .<u‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻘﻞ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ <x‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٥٠‬‬

‫‪ b‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪°٠→ °٢٧٠ → °٩٠ :‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪.٣‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪.<M‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [5Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ (5‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [OnzD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(zD‬‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪ (١٣٤‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫]‪) [5Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ (5‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) OnzD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.[(zD‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٥١‬‬

‫‪ k‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪١٥٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬ ‫>‪ <1s‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺜﻘﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﻟﻠﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻦ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪.<6‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ k‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺧﺮﻭﺝ‬

‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 7‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 8‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ .<U‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 5‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬

‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 6‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬

‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 4‬ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ‬

‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬

‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‘ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ“‬

‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬

‫‪ 9‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (١٧‬ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫>‪.<6‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E5‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭ** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪.(١٦١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺹ ‪ (١٥٧-١٥٦‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪) ZoomBrowser EX/ImageBrowser‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١٥٣‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[4‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Slide show‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﺢ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫>‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪jAll] :‬‬ ‫‪) images‬ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪) zStills/‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪/‬‬ ‫‪) kMovies‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‪) iDate/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ([‪ .‬ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ i) [iDate‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ >‪<zH‬‬ ‫ﺑﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [Select date‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﻭﺻﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬

‫‪ jAll images‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬

‫‪iDate‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬

‫‪kMovies‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪zStills‬‬

‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬ ‫)ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫)ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬

‫‪١٥٤‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪[Set up‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ]‪Play‬‬ ‫‪) [time‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ( ﻭ]‪) [Repeat‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ( ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬

‫]‪) [Play time‬ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫‪٥‬‬

‫]‪) [Repeat‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ(‬

‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Start‬ﺑﺪء(‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫)ﺟﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪[Loading image...‬‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،(...‬ﺳﻴﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<0‬‬ ‫)]‪ [G‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ(‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪<0‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬

‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ >‪.<6‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٥٧-١٥٦‬‬

‫‪١٥٥‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺣﺴﺐ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪(HD‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫)ﺃﺳﻮﺩ(‬ ‫)ﺃﺻﻔﺮ(‬

‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬ ‫>‪ <q/C‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <Canon‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬ ‫>‪.<q/C‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺑﻄﺮﻓﻲ ﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻭﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٥٢‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ]‪ 6) [6Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٥٦‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ )‪(HD‬‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) HTC-100‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ‬ ‫>‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻞ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ >‪ <dHDMI MINI‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺩﺧﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪.<D‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺩﺧﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻭﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺄﻓﻀﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻳﻮﻓﺮﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٥٢‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻮﺕ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪ <q/C‬ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪ <D‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬

‫‪١٥٧‬‬

‫‪ K‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Protect‬‬ ‫‪) [images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <K‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<K‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ .<M‬ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪ ،(٤٠‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٦٠‬ﺳﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ٍ‬

‫‪١٥٨‬‬

‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺟﻤﻴﻌًﺎ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٨‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺮﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﻤﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺤﻤﺎﻳﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ 73+1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺗﻴﻦ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪.JPEG‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<L‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Erase‬ﻣﺴﺢ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ >‪ <X‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻛﺪﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Erase‬‬ ‫‪) [images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪١٥٩‬‬

‫‪ L‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Select and erase images‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Select and erase images‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬ ‫>‪.<V‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <X‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰ >‪.<L‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪[3Erase images‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [All images on card‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٠‬‬

‫‪١٦٠‬‬

‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻼً‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ -‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬

‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪(RGB/‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪/Shutter‬ﻣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬

‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪/‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬

‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬

‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻗﻬﺎ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫* ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ،73+1‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪.73‬‬ ‫* ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ >‪ <k‬ﻭﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ]‪ [MOV‬ﻭﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )]‪.([640] ،[1280] ،[1920‬‬ ‫ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻮﻣﺾ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻣﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻠﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٦١‬‬

‫‪ B‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻔﻴﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ( ﻓﻲ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [4Histogram‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺭﺳﻤًﺎ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻴًﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺘﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺴﻄﻮﻋﻬﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻧﺸﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺟﻪ ﻋﺎﻡ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﻟﻠﻤﺨﻄﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [RGB‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺃﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺃﺯﺭﻕ(‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )‪ RGB‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻭﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻟﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻏﻤﻖ ﻭﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺸﺒﻌﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﺩﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﻇﻬﺎﺭ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ‪) RGB‬ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺸﺒﻌﻪ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٦٢‬‬

‫‪٩‬‬

‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪(١٦٤‬‬ ‫ﺑﺈﻣﻜﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ "‪ ،"wPictBridge‬ﻭﻫﻮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪) (DPOF‬ﺹ ‪(١٧٣‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ً‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ )ﺹ ‪(١٧٧‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٦٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬

‫‪١٦٤‬‬

‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪q/‬‬ ‫‪ <C‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ >‪ <D‬ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗُﺼﺪﺭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪wPictBridge‬‬

‫‪٦‬‬

‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<x‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺭﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻘﻨﻴﺔ ‪ CP Direct‬ﺃﻭ ‪.Bubble Jet Direct‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٥‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺳﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <x‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺹ ‪.(١٧٧‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ LP-E5‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ .‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ )ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ( ﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪) ACK-E5‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٦٥‬‬

‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <w‬ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٠‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٥‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺎ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﻧﻮﻋﻪ ﻭﺗﺨﻄﻴﻄﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫*ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪١٦٦‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ( ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪ Q‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Y‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪،Canon‬‬ ‫ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ U‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫‪) Bordered‬ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‬ ‫‪) Borderless‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ(‬ ‫‪Borderedc‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ ‪(c‬‬ ‫‪) xx-up‬ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫‪ ٢٠) 20-upc‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫‪ ٣٥) 35-upp‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫‪) Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬

‫ﺳﺘﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻧُﺴﺦ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺳﻴﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ١٣×٩‬ﺳﻢ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٦‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪ ٢٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٣٥‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ ،(DPOF‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ A4‬ﺃﻭ ‪) Letter‬ﺹ ‪.(١٧٨‬‬ ‫• ]‪ ٢٠) [upc-٢٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ﺳﻴﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬

‫* ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻭﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻛﻠﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.Exif‬‬

‫‪١٦٧‬‬

‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺑﺤﺎﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﺘﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ >‪،<z‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪<e‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧٠‬‬

‫‪) EOn‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻒ‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪Exif‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪) EOff‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬

‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪) EVivid‬ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ(‬

‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺑﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪) ENR‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ(‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪) B/W 0‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻮﺩ(‬

‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺷﺒﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪Cool tone 0‬‬ ‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻫﺎﺩﺋﺔ(‬

‫ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺧﻔﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ ﻟﻠﺰﺭﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪ Warm tone 0‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺋﻞ‬ ‫)ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‬ ‫‪) zNatural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪"Natural‬‬ ‫‪zNatural M‬‬ ‫)ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫)ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ(‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻳﻔﻮﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ "‪) "Natural‬ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪EDefault‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‬

‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫* ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺐ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻳﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٧٠‬‬

‫‪١٦٨‬‬

‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪٥‬‬

‫‪٦‬‬

‫‪٧‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <I‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ُ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ >‪ <R‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻭﺳﺘﺒﺪﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎء ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪) .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ‪ (.‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﺹ ‪.(١٧١‬‬ ‫ﺇﻥ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ( ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﺎ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ]‪) [Default‬ﺍﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٧١‬ﻓﺴﺘﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Stop‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ]‪) [Clear all camera settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‪) ،‬ﺹ ‪،(١٣٦‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٦٩‬‬

‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪ e‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،١٧٠‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <e‬ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ‬ ‫>‪ ،<z‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ .<B‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٤‬‬

‫‪) Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺳﻄﻮﺡ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ >‪ .<h‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (١٢٧‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٢٨‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(٢٥٥‬‬ ‫‪) kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ(‬ ‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) .Red-eye corr‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬ ‫ﻓﻌّﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺑﻌﻴﻦ ﺣﻤﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍ ]‪) [kBrightener‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ﻭ]‪) [.Red-eye corr‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Detail set.‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Contrast‬ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬ ‫ﻭ]‪) [Saturation‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﺒﻊ( ﻭ]‪) [Color tone‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ( ﻭ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ .‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]‪) [Color balance‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ >‪ .<S‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ B‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻣﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺟﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ G‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪) [Clear all‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧٠‬‬

‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻞ‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻟﻮ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺛﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﻀﻄﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Trimming‬ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻭﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ ﻭﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <u‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<I‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ .‬ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺯﺍﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻓﻘﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<B‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻫﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻴﺢ ﻟﻚ ﺇﻧﺸﺎء ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻣﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ ،<6‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٠,٥‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <O‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﻴﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ‪.‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧١‬‬

‫‪ w‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﺣﺴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺻﻐﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﺤﺒﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻧﻈﺮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺣﺒﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ( ﻭﺣﺪﺩﺕ ]‪[Continue‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ( ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻻﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫>‪ <0‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺄﻧﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﻞ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Paper Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‬ ‫‪) Ink Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺧﺰﺍﻥ ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Hardware Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ(‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) File Error‬ﺧﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ .PictBridge‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧٢‬‬

‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪(.‬‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬ ‫]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[Print order‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Set up‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ً‬ ‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Print type‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬ ‫ﻭ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‬

‫]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬

‫‪١٧٣‬‬

‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬

‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪Print type‬‬ ‫)ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬

‫‪L‬‬ ‫‪K‬‬ ‫‪L‬‬

‫‪Standard‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ(‬ ‫‪Index‬‬ ‫)ﻓﻬﺮﺱ(‬

‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺼﻐﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪) Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ( ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﻋﻴﻬﺎ؛ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫‪On‬‬ ‫‪) Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫‪On‬‬ ‫‪File number‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬ ‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬

‫]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<7‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ( ﺃﻭ ]‪All‬‬ ‫‪) [image‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩﺓ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪) [File No.‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ( ﻭﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺣﺪﺩﺗﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺛﻢ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ]‪) [Date‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ( ﻭ]‪[File No.‬‬ ‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧٤‬‬

‫‪ W‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪(DPOF‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪) Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <I‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<u‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ <M‬ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‬

‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬

‫]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ]‪) [Both‬ﻛﻼﻫﻤﺎ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨُﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪) [Index‬ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻊ >‪ <X‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬

‫‪) All image‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Mark all on card‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﺴﺨﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫]‪) [Clear all on card‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ "‪) "All image‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪ ،‬ﻓﻠﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻭﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻻ ﺗﻄﺒﻊ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺩﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧٥‬‬

‫‪ W‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،PictBridge‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪) DPOF‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .١٦٤‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء "ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ" ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪.٥‬‬

‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪) [Print‬ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪٥‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Paper settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ(‪) .‬ﺹ ‪(١٦٧‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (١٧٠‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺰﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Bordered‬ﺑﺤﺪﻭﺩ(‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻤﺖ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺗﺤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ]‪) [Adjust levels‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Manual‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪[Resume‬‬ ‫)ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ(‪ .‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻓﻬﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻭﻗﻔﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺙ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺌﻨﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٧٧‬‬

‫‪١٧٦‬‬

‫‪ d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ )‪EOS DIGITAL‬‬ ‫‪ Solution Disk‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪" ،‬ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ"‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻬﻴﺰ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء‬ ‫>‪.<k‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ >‪q/‬‬ ‫‪ <C‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ >‪ <D‬ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬًﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻣﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧٧‬‬

‫‪ d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪EOS‬‬ ‫‪.[Utility‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ]‪ [EOS Utility‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ]‪ [EOS Utility‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪ EOS Utility‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫)ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ(‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ]‪) [My Pictures‬ﺻﻮﺭﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ‬ ‫]‪) [Pictures‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﻭﻓﻘًﺎ ﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) All Images‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [All Images‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‪ <l‬ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﻀﺎءً‪.‬‬

‫ﻭﺑﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﺣﺠﻤًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧٨‬‬

‫‪ d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬

‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺷﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ]‪) [All images‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﺪء ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<l‬‬ ‫‪) New images‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ(‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Transfer order images‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١٨٨‬‬ ‫‪) Select & transfer‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﻧﻘﻞ(‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺃﻧﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬

‫‪) Wallpaper‬ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ(‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺗﻨﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪.<M‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ً <0‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ ،<l‬ﺳﻴﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪[OK‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ RAW‬ﻛﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٧٩‬‬

‫‪ d‬ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[3‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫]‪) [Transfer order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [Transfer order images‬ﻧﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ( ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،١٨٧‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪) Sel.Image‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺭﺗﺒﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ >‪ً <X‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<M‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪) All image‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪) [Mark all on card‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺗﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪Clear all on‬‬ ‫‪) [card‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻟﻜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗُﺪﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ؛ ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻠﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،73+1‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ RAW‬ﻭ‪ JPEG‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ً‬ ‫ﺩﻓﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪) [All images‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٦‬‬

‫‪١٨٠‬‬

‫‪١٠‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﺗﻔﻀﻴﻼﺗﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤ ﻨ‬

‫ﺍﻹﺑ‬

‫ﻄﻘﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺪ‬

‫‪١٨١‬‬ ‫‪١٨١‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ])‪[Custom Functions (C.Fn‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[7‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Custom‬‬ ‫)‪) [Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﺛﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <U‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ )ﺭﻗﻢ(‬ ‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ‪ ٣‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ]‪) [Clear settings 7‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪Clear all Custom Func.‬‬ ‫)‪) [(C.Fn‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ( ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٦‬‬

‫‪١٨٢‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫‪ A‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪LV‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫‪١‬‬

‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬

‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪Av‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪٥‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫‪ k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫ﺹ ‪١٨٤‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫‪٦‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬

‫‪٧‬‬

‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫ﺹ ‪١٨٥‬‬ ‫ﺹ ‪١٨٦‬‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬

‫)‪ ٠‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪٨‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬

‫‪٩‬‬

‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬

‫ﺹ ‪١٨٧‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫‪١٠‬‬

‫ﺯﺭ ‪/Shutter‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬

‫‪١١‬‬

‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬

‫‪١٢‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫‪١٣‬‬

‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺹ ‪١٨٨‬‬ ‫ﺹ ‪١٨٩‬‬

‫)‪ ١‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ(‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ( ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪) .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪(.‬‬

‫‪١٨٣‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١‬‬

‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫‪ ٣/١ :٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٢/١ :١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٢/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AEB‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻔﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺃﻗﻞ ﺩﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٣/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٢‬‬

‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬

‫‪) Off :٠‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫‪) On :١‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻹﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 6400‬ﻭ‪) H‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪.(ISO 12800‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٣‬‬

‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) Av‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬

‫‪) Auto :٠‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) 1/200-1/60 sec. auto :١‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٦٠/١–٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ )‪ ،(f‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺭﻏﻢ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ٢٠٠/١) 1/200 sec. :٢‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( )ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ﺣﻴﺚ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻌﻪ ﺑﻬﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬

‫‪١٨٤‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٤‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫‪) Off :٠‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫‪) Auto :١‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻣﻤﺎﺛﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻫﺬﺍ ً‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) On :٢‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ً‬ ‫ﻓﻌﺎﻻ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻓﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫]‪) [Auto‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻗﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻮﺣﺎ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO 1600‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪.١‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،٢‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "‪) "BUSY‬ﻣﺸﻐﻮﻝ( ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٥‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪،ISO‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻥ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪ ISO‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻟﻴﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬

‫‪) Standard :٠‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪) Low :١‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‬ ‫‪) Strong :٢‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬ ‫‪) Disable :٣‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،٢‬ﺳﻴﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٨٥‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٦‬‬

‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‬

‫‪) Disable :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪) Enable :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺪءًﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﻪ ‪ ٪١٨‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺑﺄﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺳﺎﻃﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺬﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺴﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﺝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺎﺩﻱ ﻭﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﺎﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻴﻼ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ ،١‬ﺳﺘﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٣٢٠٠‬‬ ‫ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪ <A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٧‬‬

‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫‪) Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ(‬ ‫‪) Low‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ(‬ ‫‪) Strong‬ﻗﻮﻱ(‬ ‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬

‫‪:٠‬‬ ‫‪:١‬‬ ‫‪:٢‬‬ ‫‪:٣‬‬

‫ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Standard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٨٦‬‬

‫‪B‬‬

‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺩﺍﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻌﻜﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ‬ ‫‪ RAW‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪Digital Photo Professional‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ(‪.‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٣‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٨‬‬

‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪.EOS‬‬

‫‪) Enable :٠‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬ ‫‪) Disable :١‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Only external flash emits :٢‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ ،EOS‬ﺳﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻦ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﻃﻼﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ]‪) [AF-assist beam firing‬ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ EOS‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Disabled‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻃﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ ٢/٠-٨‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪٩‬‬

‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‬

‫‪) Disable :٠‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪) Enable :١‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﺳﻠﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ(‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ١٠٤‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٨٧‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ :٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٠‬‬

‫ﺯﺭ ‪/Shutter‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬

‫‪) AF/AE lock :٠‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪) AE lock/AF :١‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪<A‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪.(AE‬‬ ‫‪) AF/AF lock, no AE lock :٢‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪) AI Servo AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،(AI Servo‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪ <A‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺤﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫)‪ (AF‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻋﺎﺋﻖ ﻳﻤﺮ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) AE/AF, no AE lock :٣‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬ ‫ﻭﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻔﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻸﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪AI Servo‬‬ ‫‪) AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،(AI Servo‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <A‬ﻟﺒﺪء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ .AI Servo‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻟﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭﻙ ﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١١‬‬

‫ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) SET‬ﺿﺒﻂ(‬

‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‪ .<0‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫‪:٠‬‬

‫‪:١‬‬

‫‪:٢‬‬ ‫‪:٣‬‬ ‫‪:٤‬‬ ‫‪:٥‬‬

‫‪١٨٨‬‬

‫‪) Quick Control screen‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <6‬ﻟﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) Image quality‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <S‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫‪) Flash exposure compensation‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ ،<0‬ﺳﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪) LCD monitor On/Off‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‪.<B‬‬ ‫‪) Menu display‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ >‪.<M‬‬ ‫‪) Disabled‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪N‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٢‬‬

‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬

‫‪) Display :٠‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٢‬‬ ‫‪) Retain power OFF status :١‬ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٣‬‬

‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬

‫‪) Off :٠‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫‪) On :١‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ )ﺹ ‪ ،(١٦١‬ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ >‪.<L‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ ،‬ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪OSK-E3‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ‪/‬ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪.OSK-E3‬‬

‫‪١٨٩‬‬

‫‪ 3‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪N‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [My Menu settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[9‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪My Menu‬‬ ‫‪) [settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Register‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺼﺮ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [OK‬ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻖ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ <0‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ‪My Menu‬‬ ‫)ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫>‪.<M‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ"‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺯ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪) My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‪ .‬ﺣﺪﺩ ]‪) [Sort‬ﻓﺮﺯ(‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪ .<0‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ]‪،[0‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ >‪ <V‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<0‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ‪ /‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Delete‬ﺣﺬﻑ( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻋﻨﺼﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ]‪) [Delete all items‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ( ﺑﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ"‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ً [9‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩٠‬‬

‫‪١١‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬

‫ﻳﻮﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻭﻓﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻟﺘﺴﻬﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩١‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻓﺸﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ )ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫>‪ (<o‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‬ ‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻗﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻮﺍﺋﻂ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﺘﺔ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ‬ ‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻛﺲ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﻯ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬ ‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﺺ ﺇﻟﺦ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ‬ ‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻧﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻧﺎﻃﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﻭﻟﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪ (١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺪﺩ ً‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻓﺎ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺍﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٦‬‬ ‫)‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <MF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻒ )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﻭﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ f/5.6‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫)ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ /f‬ﺃﻛﺒﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺜﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ u/‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻲ(‪ .‬ﻟﻼﻃﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻀﺎﻋﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻔﺸﻞ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ u/‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.١١٥‬‬

‫‪١٩٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) ACK-E5‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻖ ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬ ‫‪٣‬‬ ‫‪٤‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺳﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﻤﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬

‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﻭﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺴﺘﻘﺮ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻪ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬

‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻓﺼﻠﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬

‫‪١٩٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RC-1/RC-5‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻻﺳﻠﻜﻴًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻣﺘﺎﺭ‪ ١٦,٤/‬ﻗﺪﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ RC-1‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ Shutter‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ RC-5‬ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‪.‬‬

‫‪RC-1‬‬

‫‪RC-5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬

‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <Q‬ﺹ ‪.(٥٥‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺳﺘﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ‪.‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪) RS-60E3‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ﻃﻮﻟﻪ ‪ ٦٠‬ﺳﻢ‪ ٢/‬ﻗﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻄﺮﻑ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩٤‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪ (٢٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‬ ‫ﺑﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻠﺰﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻭﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬

‫‪١‬‬ ‫‪٢‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻲ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬

‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺠﻮﻳﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩٥‬‬

‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪EOS‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ ﻛﻔﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ( ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻮ ﻳﺸﺒﻪ ً‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺷﺎ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪Speedlite‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ .EX‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ A‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪.EX‬‬

‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪Macro Lites‬‬

‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlit‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬

‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﻳﻦ ]‪) [Flash exp. comp‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ﻭ]‪ [E-TTL II‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫]‪) [External flash func. setting‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ( )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٩‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EX‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪[Shutter sync.‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ‪ً (Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪(.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺭﻣﺰ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪ y‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.C‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪ TTL‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩٦‬‬

‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪EX‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪ EZ/E/EG/ML/TL‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫‪ TTL‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،A-TTL‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺄﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <a‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ( ﺃﻭ >‪) <f‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪٢٠٠/١‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ Canon‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﻣﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺤﻮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩٧‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫‪ :o‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ :k‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬

‫‪ ISO‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬

‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪RAW‬‬

‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪RAW + 73‬‬

‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪k k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾﻣﺴﺒﻖﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬

‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬

‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬

‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ‪o‬‬

‫‪١٩٨‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫‪8 a fs d C 7 6 5 4 3 2 1‬‬

‫‪JPEG‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ‬

‫‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪AI Servo‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪AI Focus‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪(AF‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ (AF‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬

‫‪ :o‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ‪ :k‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ‬

‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬

‫‪8 a fs d C 7 6 5 4 3 2 1‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻣﻮﺿﻌﻲ‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪١‬‬

‫‪*k‬‬

‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫*‪٢‬‬

‫‪k k k‬‬

‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪(AEB‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬

‫‪k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬

‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k k k k k k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪ :‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ‬

‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬ ‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬

‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬

‫‪k k k k k‬‬

‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬ ‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪Adobe RGB‬‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬

‫‪k k k k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪(FE‬‬ ‫*‪٢‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‬

‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬

‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬

‫‪sRGB‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫*‪٣‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k k‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪k‬‬

‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬

‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬

‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‬

‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬

‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫‪ :‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫‪o‬‬

‫*‪ :١‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ")‪ (٢‬ﺗﺒﻬﻴﺖ‪/‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ" ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٥٤‬‬ ‫*‪ :٢‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ")‪ (٣‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ" ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٥٤‬‬ ‫*‪ :٣‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Remote control‬ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‪.‬‬

‫‪١٩٩‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬

‫‪) Quality‬ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ(‬

‫‪1 / 73+1 / 86 / 76 / 84 / 74 / 83 / 73‬‬

‫‪٧٠‬‬

‫‪) Beep‬ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ(‬

‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬

‫‪١٣٠‬‬

‫‪Release shutter without‬‬ ‫‪) card‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ Shutter‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ(‬

‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬

‫‪١٣٠‬‬

‫‪Review time‬‬

‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ‪8 sec. /‬‬ ‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) .2 sec /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ( ‪ٍ ٤) 4 sec. /‬‬

‫)ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ(‬

‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ‪) Hold /‬ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ(‬ ‫)‪ٍ ٨‬‬

‫‪١٣٠‬‬

‫‪Peripheral illumination‬‬ ‫‪correction‬‬

‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬

‫‪١٠٠‬‬

‫)ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪Red-eye On/Off‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء(‬ ‫‪) Flash control‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ(‬

‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) On /‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ /‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ /‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪ /‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬

‫‪٦٣‬‬ ‫‪١٣٩‬‬

‫‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬ ‫‪Exposure compensation‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪/‬‬ ‫‪) AEB‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬

‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١/٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪ ٢± ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬

‫‪٨٦‬‬

‫‪Metering mode‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬

‫‪q/w/r/e‬‬

‫‪٨٣‬‬

‫‪Custom WB‬‬ ‫)ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ(‬

‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫‪٩٦‬‬

‫‪WB SHIFT/BKT‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‬

‫‪ :WB correction‬ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫‪ :WB-BKT‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫‪٩٨‬‬ ‫‪٩٩‬‬

‫‪) Color space‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ(‬

‫‪sRGB / Adobe RGB‬‬

‫‪٩٣‬‬

‫‪Picture Style‬‬ ‫)ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‬

‫‪) PStandard‬ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ‪) QPortrait /‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ‪) RLandscape‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ‪) SNeutral /‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ( ‪) UFaithful /‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ( ‪) VMonochrome /‬ﻟﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪) ٣ ,٢ ,١ .WUser Def /‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪(٣ ،٢ ،١‬‬

‫‪٧٣‬‬ ‫‪٨٨‬‬ ‫‪٩١‬‬

‫‪Dust Delete Data‬‬ ‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ(‬

‫ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬

‫‪١٤٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬

‫‪١٥٨‬‬

‫‪) Rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ(‬

‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻴﺔ‬

‫‪١٥١‬‬

‫‪) Erase images‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬

‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬

‫‪١٥٩‬‬

‫‪) Print order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‬

‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ )‪(DPOF‬‬

‫‪١٧٣‬‬

‫‪) Transfer order‬ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ(‬

‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬

‫‪١٨٠‬‬

‫‪3‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬ ‫‪) Protect images‬ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬

‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪ [2] ٢‬ﻭﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ [7] ٣‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ]‪) [9‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ( ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٠٠‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫‪4‬ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﻕ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬

‫‪) Histogram‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‬

‫‪) Brightness‬ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ( ‪RGB /‬‬

‫‪١٦٢‬‬

‫‪) Slide show‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ(‬

‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻠﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬

‫‪١٥٤‬‬

‫‪) Image jump w/ 6‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻘﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(w/ 6‬‬

‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪ ١٠ /‬ﺻﻮﺭ ‪ ١٠٠ /‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ /‬ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ‪ /‬ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ‪ /‬ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬

‫‪١٤٩‬‬

‫‪5‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬ ‫‪) Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬ ‫‪) File numbering‬ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ(‬ ‫‪) Auto rotate‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬

‫‪ ٣٠) 30 sec.‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ‪) 1 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪) 2 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺘﺎﻥ( ‪ ٤) 4 min. /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ‪8 min. /‬‬ ‫)‪ ٨‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ‪ ١٥) 15 min. /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬ ‫‪) Continuous‬ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺻﻞ( ‪) Auto reset /‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ‪Manual reset /‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ(‬

‫‪١٣١‬‬

‫‪١٣٢‬‬

‫‪) OnPD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) OnD / (PD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) Off / (D‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬

‫‪١٣٤‬‬

‫‪) Format‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ(‬

‫ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‬

‫‪٤٠‬‬

‫‪) LCD auto off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬

‫‪) Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬

‫‪١٣٨‬‬

‫‪) Screen color‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬

‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬

‫‪١٣٨‬‬

‫‪6‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬ ‫‪) LCD brightness‬ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ (LCD‬ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺳﺒﻌﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﺴﻄﻮﻉ‬ ‫‪) Date/Time‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ(‬

‫‪١٣١‬‬

‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ( ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ(‬

‫‪٢٩‬‬

‫‪) Language‬ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ(‬

‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻐﺔ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬

‫‪٣٠‬‬

‫‪) Video system‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‬

‫‪NTSC / PAL‬‬

‫‪١٥٦‬‬

‫‪) Auto cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪) Enable :‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ( ‪) Disable /‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‬ ‫‪) Sensor cleaning‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ(‬

‫‪) Clean now‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻦ(‬

‫‪١٤٢‬‬

‫‪) Clean manually‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‬

‫‪١٤٥‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ‪ /‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ / ((AF‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪ /‬ﻣﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬

‫‪١٠٦‬‬

‫ﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻴﻔﻤﺎ ﺗﺸﺎء‬

‫‪١٨٢‬‬

‫‪) Clear settings‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ(‬

‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ /‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ )‪ / (C.Fn‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‬

‫‪١٣٦‬‬

‫‪) .Firmware Ver‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ(‬

‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ‬

‫‪Live View function settings‬‬ ‫)ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ(‬

‫‪7‬ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) ٣‬ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬ ‫)‪Custom Functions (C.Fn‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‬

‫–‬

‫‪) 9My Menu‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ( )ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺧﻀﺮ(‬ ‫‪) My Menu settings‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ(‬

‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻜﺮﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬

‫‪١٩٠‬‬

‫‪٢٠١‬‬

‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬

‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪ k‬ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ )ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﻤﺮ(‬ ‫‪Grid display‬‬ ‫)ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ(‬

‫‪) Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ( ‪) ١l Grid /‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪)٢m Grid / (١‬ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪(٢‬‬

‫‪١٢٤‬‬

‫‪Metering timer‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‬

‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ( ‪ ١٦) .sec ١٦ /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ‪٣٠) .sec ٣٠ /‬‬ ‫‪ٍ ٤) .sec ٤‬‬ ‫ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ( ‪) .min ١ /‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ( ‪ ١٠) .min ١٠ /‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ( ‪٣٠ /‬‬ ‫‪ ٣٠) .min‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‬

‫‪١٢٤‬‬

‫‪٦٤٠x٤٨٠ / ١٢٨٠x٧٢٠ / ١٩٢٠x١٠٨٠‬‬

‫‪١٢٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ‪ /‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ‪ / u‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬

‫‪١٢٣‬‬

‫‪) On‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ‪) Off /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‬

‫‪١٢٤‬‬

‫‪) Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ( ‪) Enable /‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‬

‫‪١٢٤‬‬

‫‪Movie recording size‬‬ ‫)ﺣﺠﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ(‬ ‫‪AF mode‬‬ ‫)ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‬ ‫‪Sound recording‬‬ ‫)ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬ ‫‪Remote control‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ(‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ]‪) [k‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ( ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺘﻲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪ [7] ٣‬ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ]‪) [9‬ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ]‪ ،[2‬ﺳﻴﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [Expo. comp./AEB‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ( ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪) [Exposure comp.‬ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫• ]‪ : [1‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫• ]‪ : [2‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪) WB SHIFT/BKT ،‬ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ‪/‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬ ‫• ]‪ : [5‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫• ]‪ : [6‬ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬

‫‪٢٠٢‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻻﺳﺘﻌﺎﻧﺔ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺨﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E5‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪.Canon‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٦‬‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٤‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٦‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣١‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪) <B‬ﺹ ‪.(٤٢‬‬

‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<2‬‬ ‫ﻟﺜﻮﺍﻥ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻧﻘﻄﻌﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺳﻴﻮﻣﺾ‬ ‫ٍ‬ ‫ﻭﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﺘﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﻧﻔﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٤‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺷﺮﺍء ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ )ﺹ ‪،(١٢١ ،١٠٥‬‬ ‫ﻳﻘﻞ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٠٣‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [5Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [5Auto power off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Off‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ >‪ <B‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪.LCD‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ )ﺹ ‪.(٣١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﻹﻓﺮﺍﻍ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫)ﺹ ‪.(١٥٩ ،٣١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺎﻭﻟﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) One-Shot AF‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺿﻮء ﺗﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ >‪ <o‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٦٧ ،٣٧‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ‪) Write/Erase‬ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪/‬ﻣﺴﺢ( )ﺹ ‪.(٣١‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺆﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ >‪) <AF‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( )ﺹ ‪.(٣٣‬‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺮﻓﻖ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٧ ،٣٦‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪ IS‬ﻋﻠﻰ >‪.<1‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻈﺮ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪.٢١٥‬‬

‫‪٢٠٤‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪High‬‬ ‫‪) [ISO speed noise reduction‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﺶ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Standard‬‬ ‫)ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Low‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ( ﺃﻭ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪[Strong‬‬ ‫)ﻗﻮﻱ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٨٥‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺫﻱ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ )ﺣﻘﻞ ﺃﻋﺸﺎﺏ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻴﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.٧٠‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.١٠٠‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫]‪) [Highlight tone priority‬ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ( ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪) [Enable‬ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .١٠٠‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Disable‬ﺗﻌﻄﻴﻞ(‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫‪) ١٠٠‬ﺹ ‪.(١٨٦‬‬

‫ﺑﻂء ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ >‪ <f‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻤﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ( ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ Shutter‬ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ؛ ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ])‪) [7Custom Functions (C.Fn‬ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]‪) [Flash sync. speed in Av mode‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪ (Av‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ١‬ﺃﻭ ‪) ٢‬ﺹ ‪.(١٨٤‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﻻ ﻳﻨﻄﻠﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﻔﻮﺍﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻴﺔ ﻗﺼﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٠٥‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬

‫ﺿﺠﻴﺠﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ُﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﺜﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء‪ .‬ﻭﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻣﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳُﺼﺪﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٣٢٠٠‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴُﺼﺪﺭ ‪ Shutter‬ﺻﻮﺗﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺹ ‪.(١٠٧‬‬

‫ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻘﺎء ﻧﻔﺴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪SD‬‬ ‫" ﺃﻭ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪" ٦‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻬﺔ ﺗﺼﻨﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺑﻠﻎ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ٢٩‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭ‪ ٥٩‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺳﻴﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ‪ ١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ً ٢٠‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ؛ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺒﺪﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪) ٧٢٠×١٢٨٠‬ﺹ ‪.(١٢٣‬‬

‫ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺠﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺞ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(١٢٧‬‬

‫‪٢٠٦‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻣﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﺤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻠﺘﺼﻘﺔ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﻓﺎﻣﺴﺢ ﺳﻄﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻣﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﻔﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﻭ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ً LCD‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﻛ ًﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ LCD‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻓﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻗﻠﻴﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻭﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻮﻳﺐ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٣٨‬‬

‫ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٨‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ )"_‪.("_MG‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ .sRGB‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ ،Adobe RGB‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺳﻴﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺷﺮﻃﺔ ﺳﻔﻠﻴﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٩٣‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪.٠٠٠١‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺗﺮﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺧﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(١٣٢‬‬

‫‪٢٠٧‬‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻜﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬

‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺻﺤﺔ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﻠﺬﻳﻦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻭﻗﺘﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﻦ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٩‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (AV‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٧ ,١٥٦‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (NTSC/PAL‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٠٥‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )‪ (AV‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )ﺹ ‪.(١٥٦‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺴﺮﺩ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ )ﺹ ‪.(١٦٨‬‬

‫‪٢٠٨‬‬

‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬ ‫‪٠١‬‬

‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﻞ‬ ‫‪Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the‬‬ ‫‪) .lens contacts‬ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺃﺧﻄﺎء‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪) .Canon‬ﺹ ‪(١٦ ،١٣‬‬

‫‪٠٢‬‬

‫‪Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card‬‬ ‫‪) .with camera‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺘﻬﺎ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٠ ،٣١‬‬

‫‪٠٤‬‬

‫‪) .Cannot save images because card is full. Replace card‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺣﻔﻆ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻧﻈﺮًﺍ ﻻﻣﺘﻼء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ )ﺹ ‪.(٤٠ ،١٥٩ ،٣١‬‬

‫‪٠٥‬‬

‫‪The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on‬‬ ‫‪) .again‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٧‬‬

‫‪٠٦‬‬

‫‪) .Shooting is not possible. Turn the camera off and on again‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪ Í‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﺹ ‪.(٢٧‬‬

‫‪Shooting is not possible due to an error. Turn the camera off and ،٢٠ ،١٠‬‬ ‫‪) .on again ،٤٠ ،٣٠‬ﻳﺘﻌﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺧﻄﺄ‪ .‬ﺃﻭﻗﻒ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪(.‬‬ ‫‪،٦٠ ،٥٠‬‬ ‫‪ Í ٨٠ ،٧٠‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪) Canon‬ﺹ ‪.(٢٦ ،٢٧‬‬ ‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪ ،‬ﻓﺪﻭﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬

‫‪٢٠٩‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬

‫ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪RC-1‬‬ ‫‪RC-5‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‬ ‫‪RS-60E3‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF-S‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪EF‬‬

‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫‪HTC-100‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺑﻞ ‪AV‬‬ ‫‪AVC-DC400‬‬

‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ‬

‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﻃﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬

‫‪EOS DIGITAL‬‬ ‫‪Solution Disk‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪IFC-200U‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪IFC-500U‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫‪Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫‪Mac OS X‬‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪PC‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﺭﺉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪PCMCIA‬‬

‫‪٢١٠‬‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪OSK-E3‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SD/SDHC‬‬

‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬

‫ﻣﻮﺳﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪EP-EX15ll‬‬ ‫‪Macro Twin Lite‬‬ ‫‪MT-24EX‬‬

‫‪270EX 430EX II 580EX II Macro Ring Lite‬‬ ‫‪MR-14EX‬‬

‫‪ST-E2‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﻃﻲ ‪Ef‬‬

‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪E‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻜﺄﺱ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻲ ‪Ef‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪EW-100DB lll‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪LP-E5‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ‪C‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺷﺒﻪ ﺻﻠﺒﺔ‬

‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪ACK-E5‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪LC-E5 or LC-E5E‬‬

‫ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪BG-E5‬‬

‫ﻣﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫‪DR-E5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪CA-PS700‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪CBC-E5‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪BGM-E5A‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪AA/LR6‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪BGM-E5L‬‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺘﻴﻦ ‪LP-E5‬‬

‫‪٢١١‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻋﺎﻛﺴﺔ ﻣﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )‪ (AF/AE‬ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺪﻣﺞ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ ،SD‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SDHC‬‬ ‫‪ ١٤,٩ × ٢٢,٣‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪) Canon‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ‪(EF-S‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻳﺒﻠﻎ ‪ ١,٦‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒُﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ‪ EF‬ﻣﻦ ‪Canon‬‬

‫• ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪CMOS‬‬ ‫‪ ١٥,١٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫‪٢:٣‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺪﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ‬

‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ‪) Camera File System 2.0‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪(٢٫٠‬‬ ‫‪) RAW ،JPEG‬ﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٤‬ﺑﺖ(‬ ‫ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫‪ ١٥,١٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٣١٦٨ × ٤٧٥٢‬‬ ‫ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ ‪ ٨ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٢٣٠٤ × ٣٤٥٦‬‬ ‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ‪ ٣,٧٠ :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(١٥٦٨ × ٢٣٥٢‬‬ ‫‪ ١٥,١٠ : RAW‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﻜﺴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪(٣١٦٨ × ٤٧٥٢‬‬

‫• ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﺵ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ‪ ،‬ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٣ - ١‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‪) ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻇﻞ‪ ،‬ﻏﺎﺋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺠﺴﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮء‬ ‫ﻓﻠﻮﺭﺳﻨﺖ ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼﺵ(‪ ،‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬ ‫* ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﻮء ﻭﻛﺬﻟﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﻓﻖ‬

‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ‪:‬‬

‫‪٢١٢‬‬

‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺧﻤﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‬ ‫ﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪٩٥‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫‪ ٠,٨٧‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )‪ ١-‬ﻡ‪ ١-‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﻻﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ١٩‬ﻣﻠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪ ١-‬ﻡ‪(١-‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫‪١‬‬‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪ ١٫٠+ - ٣٫٠- :‬ﻡ )‪(dpt‬‬ ‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﻗﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ‪:‬‬

‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻮﻱ ﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪ ،TTL‬ﻭﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ ٩ :(AF‬ﻧﻘﺎﻁ‬ ‫‪) EV -0.5 - 18‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO 100‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Servo‬ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،AI Focus‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )‪(MF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪ :(AF‬ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺷﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﺒﻌﺚ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‬

‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ‪ TTL‬ﺫﻭ ‪ ٣٥‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ )ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ(‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ )‪ ٪٩‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‬ ‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ )‪ ٪٤‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‬ ‫• ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫‪) EV 1 - 20‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ،f/1.4 USM‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO 100‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺮﺑﺔ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ،‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ،Shutter‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ (AE‬ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ‪ ،‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ ISO 100 - 1600‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪:ISO‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺎ( ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪) ISO 100 - 3200 :‬ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ(‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ISO‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ISO 6400‬ﺃﻭ ‪ISO 12800‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻭﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪) (AEB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪ ٢± :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣/١‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٢/١‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪ :(AE‬ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ :‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‪ :‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )‪(AE‬‬

‫• ‪Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪:Shutter‬‬

‫‪ Shutter‬ﺑﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ‬ ‫‪ ٤٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪ ،‬ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ‪ X‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ٢٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٤٠٠٠/١‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺇﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ‪.Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪(.‬‬

‫‪٢١٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫• ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺴﺤﺐ ﻳﻨﺒﺜﻖ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،ISO 100) ٤٣/١٣ :‬ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻡ(‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ :‬ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ١٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪ٍ ٣‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ‪) EX‬ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪E-TTL II‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٢±‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣/١‬ﺃﻭ ‪٢/١‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪ :(FE‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻼ‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪:‬‬

‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪:‬‬

‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﺑﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬ ‫ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﺪﺗﻪ ‪ٍ ١٠‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ‪ ٣,٤‬ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ JPEG‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫‪ *** :RAW‬ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻘﻲ ‪ RAW+JPEG‬ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ :‬ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‬ ‫* ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪) Canon‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪ ISO 100‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ( ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺳﻌﺘﻬﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬

‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺣﻠﺔ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ )ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ٥/١٠‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪) EV 0 - 20‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪EF‬‬ ‫‪ ٥٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ،f/1.4 USM‬ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO 100‬‬

‫• ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪/‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪:‬‬

‫‪٢١٤‬‬

‫‪) MOV‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،H.264 :‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ PCM :‬ﺧﻄﻲ(‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻓﺎﺋﻘﺔ ‪،(Full HD‬‬ ‫‪ً ٢٠ / ١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪/ ٤٨٠×٦٤٠ ،(HD‬‬ ‫‪ً ٣٠ / ٧٢٠×١٢٨٠‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺡ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻴﺔ(‬ ‫‪ً ٣٠‬‬ ‫‪ *** :١٠٨٠×١٩٢٠‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ *** :٧٢٠×١٢٨٠ ،‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ *** :٤٨٠×٦٤٠ ،‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪/‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‬ ‫‪) EV 0 - 20‬ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ‪ ٥٠ EF‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ f/1.4 USM‬ﻭﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ‪(ISO 100‬‬ ‫*** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ *** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫*** ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ *** ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ LP-E5‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ(‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪LCD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺎﻁ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪:‬‬

‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ TFT‬ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻳﺴﺘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺋﻞ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ٧‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ(‬ ‫‪ ٣‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ ‪ ٩٢٠٠٠٠‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ )‪(VGA‬‬ ‫‪ ٪١٠٠‬ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫‪٢٥‬‬

‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪:‬‬

‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ‪ +‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ )ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ(‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ ١٠ - ١,٥‬ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ‪ ١٠‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ )ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،LCD‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ‬

‫• ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬

‫ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻕ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪:‬‬

‫• ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪RAW‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ١٫١‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪DPOF‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ "ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ"‪:‬‬

‫‪١٣‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬

‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺼﻴﺺ‬

‫• ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ )ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪(NTSC/PAL‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ HDMI‬ﺻﻐﻴﺮ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪) C‬ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺪﻗﺔ(‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪ :‬ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪RS-60E3‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪RC-1/RC-5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ‪:‬‬

‫• ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪) LP-E5‬ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ‪(١‬‬ ‫* ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﻭﻳﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ACK-E5‬‬ ‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ ،BG-E5‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪AA/LR6‬‬

‫‪٢١٥‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪(CIPA‬‬

‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ*** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ *** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٢٣‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٧٣/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭ*** ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‪ ٣٢/‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬

‫• ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٦١,٩ × ٩٧,٥ × ١٢٨,٨ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٢,٤ × ٣,٨ × ٥,١ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫*** ﺟﻢ ‪ *** /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬

‫• ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪:‬‬

‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ‪ ١٠٤ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٪٨٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬

‫• ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E5‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٧,٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ١٠٨٠‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺳﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٥٣,١ × ١٤,٧ × ٣٦ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٢,١ × ٠,٦ × ١,٤ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٥٠‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ١,٨ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬

‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E5‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٨,٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ‪ ١٠٤ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٪٨٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٨٧,٥ × ٢٦ × ٦٧ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣,٤ × ١ × ٢,٦ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٨٠‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٢,٨ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬

‫• ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LC-E5E‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪LP-E5‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٢‬ﻡ ‪ ٦,٦ /‬ﺃﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ )‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ٨,٤‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤُﻘﺪﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ٠ :‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٤٠ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ‪ ٣٢ /‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ ‪ ١٠٤ -‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ‬ ‫‪ ٪٨٥‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ × ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ × ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻖ(‪ ٨٧,٥ × ٢٦ × ٦٧ :‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٣,٤ × ١ × ٢,٦ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٧٥‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٢,٦ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬

‫‪٢١٦‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬

‫• ‪EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪'٥٠°٢٧ - '٢٠°٧٤ :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪'٢٠°٢٣ - '٣٠°٦٤ :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪'٤٠°١٥ - '٣٠°٤٥ :‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ٩‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪١١‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪f/22 - 36‬‬ ‫‪ ٠,٢٥‬ﻡ ‪ ٠,٨٢ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻠﺲ(‬ ‫‪ ٠,٣٤‬ﻣﺮﺓ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٥٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬ ‫‪ ٤٥ × ٦٧ - ١٣٤ × ٢٠٧‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ١,٨ × ٢,٦ - ٥,٣ × ٨,١ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٠,٢٥‬ﻡ(‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٥٨‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪E-58‬‬ ‫‪ ٧٠ × ٦٨,٥‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٢,٨ × ٢,٧ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٢٠٠‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٧,١ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫‪) EW-60C‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫‪) LP814‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬

‫• ‪EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS‬‬ ‫ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪:‬‬

‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻔﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻣُﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺷﺢ‪:‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﻗﻄﺮ × ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ‪:‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮﻱ‪'٥٠°٧ - '٢٠°٧٤ :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪'٣٠°٦ - '٣٠°٦٤ :‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪'٢٠°٤ - '٣٠°٤٥ :‬‬ ‫‪١٦‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺼﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ‪ ١٢‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫‪f/22 - 36‬‬ ‫‪ ٠,٤٥‬ﻡ ‪ ١,٤٨ /‬ﻗﺪﻡ )ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﻣﻠﺲ(‬ ‫‪ ٠,٢٤‬ﻣﺮﺓ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻣﻠﻢ(‬ ‫‪ ٦٢ × ٩٣ - ٢٩١ × ٤٥٢‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٢,٤ × ٣,٧ - ١١,٥ × ١٧,٨ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺔ‬ ‫)ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪ ٠,٤٥‬ﻡ(‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫‪ ٧٢‬ﻣﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪E-72‬‬ ‫‪ ١٠٢ × ٧٨,٦‬ﻣﻠﻢ ‪ ٤ × ٣,١ /‬ﺑﻮﺻﺎﺕ‬ ‫‪ ٥٩٥‬ﺟﻢ ‪ ٢١ /‬ﺁﻭﻧﺲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫‪) EW-78D‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬ ‫‪) LP1116‬ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ(‬

‫ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ‪.Canon‬‬ ‫ﻭﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﻄﺎﺭ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺛﺖ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Canon‬ﻭﻣﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻌﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢١٧‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪ Adobe‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Adobe Systems Incorporated‬‬ ‫‪ Windows‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺗﺨﺺ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Microsoft Corporation‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Macintosh‬ﻭ‪ Mac OS‬ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Apple Inc.‬ﻭﻫﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDHC‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ HDMI‬ﻭ‪ High-Definition Multimedia Interface‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.HDMI Licensing LLC‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﺨﺺ ﻣﺎﻟﻜﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻴﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫* ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ Camera File System 2.0‬ﻭ‪Exif 2.21‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳُﻌﺮﻑ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﻢ "‪ .("Exif Print‬ﻳﻌﺘﺒﺮ ‪Exif Print‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،Exif Print‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ ‪MPEG-4‬‬

‫"ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪ AT&T‬ﻟﻠﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺘﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻚ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ MPEG-4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻔﻴﺮﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ )‪ (١‬ﻟﻸﻏﺮﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻭﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ )‪ (٢‬ﻟﻤﻮﻓﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺧﺺ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺑﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ‪ AT&T‬ﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪ .MPEG-4‬ﻭﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺃﻡ ﺿﻤﻨﻴًﺎ ﻷﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪".MPEG-4‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺧﻴﺺ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫* ﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺤﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‪.‬‬

‫ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﺘﺤﻘﻴﻖ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﻤﺘﺎﺯ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﻣﻌﻪ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ‪ Canon‬ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪Canon‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺣﻮﺍﺩﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺷﺎﺑﻪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪) Canon‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﻳﺐ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﻐﻄﻲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺟﻤﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻋﻴﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ‪ ،Canon‬ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻃﻠﺐ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻓﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺮ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢١٨‬‬

‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﻭﻟﻌﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﻮﻓﺎﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﻱ‪.‬‬

‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻓﺎﺓ‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﻃﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺮﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻭﻣﺼﺎﺩﺭ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻴﺐ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻣٌﻌﺪﻟﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﺨﻴﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ‬‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗُﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ .‬ﻭﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻻ ﺗﺜﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﻘﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ )‪ .(- +‬ﻻ ﺗﻤﺰﺝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺮﺍﻭﺡ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﻭ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬‫)ﻭﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻭ‪ ١٠٤‬ﻓﻬﺮﻧﻬﺎﻳﺖ(‪ .‬ﻋﻼﻭ ًﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺑﺘﻠﻊ ﻃﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺸﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﺒًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪) .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻌﺪﺓ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﻌﺎء‪(.‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﺰﻝ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻳﻂ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺗﻼﻣﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﻭﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺩﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺑﺨﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﺰﻋﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺥ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗُﺼﺎﺏ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻠﺪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﻻﻣﺴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻴﻨﻴﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻠﺪﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻼﺑﺴﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻐﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺄﺛﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﻜﺜﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺣﻜﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺑﺼﻌﻖ ﺍﻟﻄﻔﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺿﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺻﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﺎ ﻳﻘﻮﺩ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻗﻮﻉ ﺣﺎﺩﺙ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺇﻟﺤﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ ﺑﺤﺎﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮ ﻟﻠﺸﺨﺺ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻄﻔﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ‪ ١‬ﻣﺘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻚ ﻭﺑﻴﻨﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ‬ ‫ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻭﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢١٩‬‬

‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺳﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻨﻚ ﻭﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺒﺖ ﺗﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﺎﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺿﻮء ﺳﺎﻃﻊ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺼﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻨﺎﻕ ﺍﻷﻃﻔﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ّ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺣﺎ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻴﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻣﺎ ﻛﺎﻥ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻌﺜﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻔﻰ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫ ﻗﻢ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻳ ٍﺪ ﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﻭﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﻣﻨﻪ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺨﺪﺵ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻄﻌﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻨﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺮﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺷﻲء ﺛﻘﻴﻞ ﻓﻮﻗﻪ‪ً .‬‬‫ﺗﻠﻮ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺮﺑﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻻ ٍ‬ ‫ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺑﺲ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬‫ ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ً‬‫ﺳﻠﻜﺎ ﻣﺎﺩﺗﻪ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﺗﺎﻟﻔﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻷﺟﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺃﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻠﻮﺛﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ‬ ‫ﺭﻃﺒﺔ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﻗﺼﺮ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺄﺧﺬ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺳﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺠﻮﺍﺭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻠﺪ ﺑﺤﺮﻭﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻭﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻟﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ٍ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﺮﻛﺒًﺎ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﻻ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺃﺷﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻳﻘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻐﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻄﻮﻕ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻘﻤﺎﺵ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺣﺘﺒﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻮﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺘﻌﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺳﻘﻄﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺷﻈﺎﻳﺎ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﻨﻊ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺎﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺴﺮﺏ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻋﻤﺮﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺨﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﻴﺔ ﻭﺗﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﺮﺍﻗﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺪﻫﺎﻥ )ﺛﻨﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﻼء( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻀﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻄﻠﺐ‬ ‫ﺇﺻﻼﺣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ ‪.Canon‬‬ ‫ً‬

‫‪٢٢٠‬‬

‫ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪DS126231‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺨﻀﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺸﺮﻃﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﻴﻦ‪:‬‬ ‫)‪ (١‬ﻻ ﻳﺠﻮﺯ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻭ)‪ (٢‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻘﺒﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻓﻴﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﺑﻤﻮﺟﺐ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ‪١٥‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪ .(FCC‬ﺗﻤﺖ ﺻﻴﺎﻏﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻮﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﻓﻴﺮ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻘﻮﻟﺔ ﺿﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺯﻝ‪ .‬ﻭﻳﻮﻟّﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻃﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﻬﺎ ﻭﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻛﺬﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻺﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻊ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺑﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻦ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺿﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺛﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺟﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪:‬‬ ‫— ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫— ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫— ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﻟﻠﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫— ﺍﺳﺘﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻛﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻨﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪/‬ﺭﺍﺩﻳﻮ ﻣﺘﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻳﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ﺏ ﻟﻠﻔﻘﺮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻟﺠﻨﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﺭﺍﻟﻴﺔ )‪.(FCC‬‬ ‫ﻳُﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﻌﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺤﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳُﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Canon U.S.A. Inc.‬‬ ‫‪One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042, U.S.A.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺭﻗﻢ‪(٥١٦) ٣٢٨ -٥٦٠٠ :‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺌﺔ ﺏ ﻣﻊ ‪ ICES-003‬ﺍﻟﻜﻨﺪﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﻤﺄﺧﺬ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪ ACK-E5‬ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪ ٢٤٠ - ١٠٠ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ ٦٠/٥٠‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﺭ‪ ١٢٫٦ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ(‪ .‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺧﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺸﻮﺏ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺳﺨﻮﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٢١‬‬

‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‬ ‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ — ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ‪ LC-E5‬ﻭ‪.LC-E5E‬‬ ‫‪ .٢‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻼﺣﻈﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺬﻳﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ )‪ (١‬ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪(٢) ،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ (٣) ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٣‬ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ—ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪ .LP-E5‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺠﺮ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﺒﺔ ﺑﺬﻟﻚ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ .٤‬ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻠﻮﺝ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٥‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﻴﻌﻬﺎ ‪ Canon‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺸﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ ﺟﺴﺪﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٦‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻭﻟﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‬ ‫ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٧‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﻠﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٨‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﺑﺴﻠﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺗﺎﻟﻒ ‪ -‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻟﻬﻤﺎ ﺑﺨﺮﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .٩‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺳﻘﻮﻃﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻔﻪ ﺑﺄﻳﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ؛ ﺑﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١٠‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ؛ ﺑﻞ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ﺇﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺆﺩﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺳﻠﻴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺑﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ .١١‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻲ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻳﺔ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻳﺔ ﺇﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺮﺩ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﻣﺆﻫﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺃﻫﻢ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﻙ‪.‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﻭﻛﻨﺪﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‪/‬ﺑﻮﻟﻴﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑـ ‪ 1-800-8-BATTERY‬ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬

‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻜﻨﺪﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻳﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺮﻛﻠﻮﺭﻳﺖ – ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬

‫‪٢٢٢‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫‪A-DEP‬‬ ‫)ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٨٢ .............‬‬ ‫‪٩٣ .....................................Adobe RGB‬‬ ‫‪) AI FOCUS‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٦٥ ..............................(AI Focus‬‬ ‫‪) AI SERVO‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪٦٥ .............................. (AI Servo‬‬ ‫‪) Av‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ(‪٧٨ .......‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ( ‪٥٣ ...............................‬‬ ‫‪١٥٧ .............................................HDMI‬‬ ‫‪٧٠ .............................................. JPEG‬‬ ‫‪) M‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ(‪٨١ ....................‬‬ ‫‪٢٠١ ............................................ NTSC‬‬ ‫‪) ONE SHOT‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ(‪٦٤ ...‬‬ ‫‪) P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ( ‪٥٨ .......................‬‬ ‫‪٢٠١ ............................................... PAL‬‬ ‫‪١٦٣ ..................................... PictBridge‬‬ ‫‪٧٢ ،٧٠ ..........................................RAW‬‬ ‫‪٧٢ ،٧٠ .............................. RAW+JPEG‬‬ ‫‪) Tv‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪٧٦ .........(Shutter‬‬ ‫‪ → WB‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‬

‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺃﺑﻴﺾ‪/‬ﺃﺳﻮﺩ )ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‪٧٤ ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻴﺔ‪١٣٦ ...............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪١٣٠ .................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺖ ‪٢٠١ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪٧٦ ................ Shutter‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٧٨ ..............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻳﺔ ‪٨١ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪٢٤ ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٦٦ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻻﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ‪١٣٣ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٣٧ ،٣٥ .................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻴﺔ‪٢٠ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪٢٠ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ‪١٨٦ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ‪١٨٦ ،٦٠ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪١٣١ ،٢٧ .......................‬‬

‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ‪٥٨ .............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ‪٥٩ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ → ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ → ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ → SD/SDHC‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٣١ ،١٣ ،٢ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺬﻛﻴﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١٣٠ ،٣١ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪٤٠ .............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ ‪٢٠٩ ،٣٢ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺌﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪١٢١ ......................... SD‬‬ ‫‪٢ ........................................... SDHC‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﻛﻦ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٩٠ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ‪١٤٣ ................................‬‬

‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٩٠ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻠﺘﺮ )ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ‪٩٠ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪٢٩ ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ‪٨٩ .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪٩٥ ......................... (FE‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪١٢٤ ،٩٤ .......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪٤٦ ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻐﻴﺮ ‪٣٤ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ‪٣٠ ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ ‪٢١٩ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ Shutter‬ﺩﻭﻥ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪٣١ .......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪١٥١ ،١٣٤ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪١٢٤ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٨٩ ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪١٠٠ .................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻓﻴﺔ‪١٠٠ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ‪١٠٥ ......................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪١١١ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ‪١٠٨ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪١٠٧ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ ‪٥٠ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪٦٨ ....................................‬‬

‫‪٢٢٣‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬

‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ‪١٩٤ ،١٢٤ ،٦٩ ،٥٥ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ → ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٨٥ .......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪٨٤ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ‪٤٩ ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻳﺶ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪ ISO‬ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪١٨٥ ،٧٢ ،٦٨ .................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻺﺿﺎءﺓ‪١٨٥ ،٨١ ...............‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء ‪٦٣ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٨٠ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ‪٥٣ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ ‪٤٤ ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ‪١٦١ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪١٧٣ .................................... DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ )ﻣﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‪١٤٢ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ‪١٤٥ ،١٤٢ ،٢٧ ....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ )ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ(‪١٧١ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ( ‪٤٠ ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪٤١ ،٤٠ ......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ‪٩٦ .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ‪٩٩ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ‪٩٨ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٩٦ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺨﺼﻲ ‪٩٧ ..........................................‬‬

‫ﺝ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪١٩٨ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪٧٠ ................................‬‬

‫ﺡ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢١٠ ..........................BG-E5‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١٦١ ،١٢٣ ،٧٠ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﺩﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪٧١ ....‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‪٢٣ .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ‪٧٤ .................................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ )ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ( ‪١٥٨ .....................‬‬

‫‪٢٢٤‬‬

‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٨٩ ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪٨٩ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‪٩٦ ...................................‬‬

‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪١٣٢ ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺭﻣﻮﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪٢٠٩ ........................................‬‬

‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪٣٧ ........................................Shutter‬‬

‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ → ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪٦٠ ..........................................ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪٦١ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ‪١٨٤ ،٦٠ .......................ISO‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ ‪٢١١ ،٣ ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪١٥٢ .............................................‬‬

‫ﺵ‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪١٣ ..........................................LCD‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٣٨ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪١٣١ .................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪٤٢ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪١٤٧ ،٥٦ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٣٨ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪١٣٨ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٨ .......................‬‬ ‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٠٢ ...............................‬‬

‫ﺹ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻴﺾ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ‪٩٠ ،٧٤ ......................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ‪٥١ .................................‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ‪٧٣ ،٥١ ،٤٧ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٥٤ ................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ‪١٥٩ ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ‪١٦١ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ‪١٦٢ ................................‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪١٤٨ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٤٩ ........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪١٥٠ .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٤٧ ،٥٦ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪١٥٨ ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪١٥١ ،١٣٤ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٦١ ،١١٠ .....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ‪١٧٧ ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺷﺨﺼﻲ‪١٧٧ ....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪١٥٦ ...........................‬‬

‫ﺽ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪ (AF‬ﺋﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺉ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪١١٨ ،٦٧ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪١١١ ،٦٤ .... (AF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪٦٦ ...... (AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪١٨٧ ،٤٥... (AF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪١٣٠ .............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﻌﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪١٩٢ ،١١٥ ....‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ ‪١١٨ ،٦٧ .......................‬‬ ‫ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﻧﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ ‪١٩٢ ،١١٥ ،٤٥ ..............‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻳﻦ ‪٤٦ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﺮﻱ‪٨٣ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻜﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪٨٣ ......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ )‪١١٨ ،٦٧ ................(MF‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ‪٨٣ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء‪٣٦ ........................‬‬

‫ﻁ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٣١ ،٢٧ ...................‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪٢٨ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻟﻴﺔ ‪١٩٣ .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ‪١٠٧ ،٢٨ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺤﻦ‪٢٤ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪٢٧ ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ → ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٦٤ .............................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﻄﻴﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ‪١٦٧ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ‪١٦٧ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪١٧٣ ....................(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ‪١٧٠ ،١٦٨ .......................‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﻣﺎﻟﺔ‪١٧١ .................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﺬﻳﺐ ‪١٧١ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪) A/V OUT‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ(‪١٥٦ ....‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪١٧٧ ،١٦٤ ....................‬‬ ‫ﻃﺮﻑ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪١٥٦ ..............‬‬

‫ﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ‪٣٥ ،٣٣ ،٢١ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻔﻚ‪٣٣ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪١٨ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ‪١٤٩ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ‪١٢٤ ،١٠٨ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﺢ ‪١٥٤ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪١٤٨ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ‪١٥٠ ،١١٨ .............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪١٥٦ ................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻓﻬﺮﺱ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٩‬ﺻﻮﺭ ‪١٤٨ ..........‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٦١ ،١٢٦ ،١١٠ .........‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪١٤٧ ،٥٦ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺿﻲ ‪٧٣ ،٤٨ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻞ ‪٢٠٣ ................................................‬‬

‫ﻍ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﻴﺔ ‪١٩٥ ،٢٣ .........................‬‬

‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪٢٨ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺒﻴﻪ‪١٦١ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪١٩٦ ،١٣٩ ............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ‪٨٠ ،٧٧ ،٦٢ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪٦٢ ................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪١٤٠ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪٦٢ ...................................‬‬

‫‪٢٢٥‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬

‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ ‪١٤١ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻄﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﺎﻝ‪٦٢ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ Speedlite‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪١٩٦ ،١٣٩ .......‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ )‪٩٥ .....................(FE‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٨٥ ...................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪٥٤ ،٥٢ ...............................‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪١٨٤ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪١٣٩ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‪٦٣ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٥٢ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪١٢٣ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪١٢١ ........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪١٢٥ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪١٥٦ ...........................‬‬

‫ﻕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪٢٠٠ ................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ ‪١٩٠ ..........................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪٣٨ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺘﻲ‪١٩٠ ...............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ(‪١٨٩ .............‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ‪١٨٧ ،١٠٤ ...................................‬‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ ‪٧٣ .................................................‬‬

‫ﻙ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪٢١١ ،٣ ...........................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪١٠٤ ................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪١٣٦ ................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻣﺴﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪٣٦ ................................‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‪١٣٥ ..............................‬‬

‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ‪١٠٧ ،٢٨ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﻥ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪٧٤ ............................................‬‬

‫‪٢٢٦‬‬

‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪٧٤ ................................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻄﻠﺤﺎﺕ ‪٢٢ ،١٦ .........................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪١٩٣ .....................‬‬ ‫ﻣُﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪١٨٦ ،٤٣ ......................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ )ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ‪١٦٢ ............... (RGB/‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﻄﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪٢١٠ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪١٣٠ ................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ‪١٤٠ .............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ‪١٤٠ ..............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺎﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ‪٩٣ ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻜﺸﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪١٩ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻧﻜﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ‪٣٦ ...................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ( ‪١٥٣ ...................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ( ‪١٥٩ ....................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻬﺪ ﻟﻴﻠﻲ ‪٤٨ ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ )ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ(‪٨١ ..................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ‪٣٢ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ‪٨١ ..............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻀﺎﻫﺎﺓ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ )‪٨٦ .............. (AEB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﻨﺔ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻝ ‪٨٠ ..................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪٨٣ .....‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ‪١٣٧ .....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪٧٥ ،١٦ ................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪٢٠ .........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﺓ‪٦٧ ،٣٣ .............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٢٠ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪٣٤ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻊ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺗﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪١٤٣ .....................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ‪٦٩ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪٦٩ ........................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻗﺖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪١٢٤ ،١٠٨ ................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪١٢٤ .........................................‬‬

‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪٢٠١ ،١٥٦ .................................‬‬

‫ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬

‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪٨٨ ............................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪٧٣ ............................................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ‪٩١ .........................................‬‬

‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ ‪٧٠ .......................................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ‪٩٣ .......................................... ICC‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‪٦٨ ............................‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪٢٠ .......................................‬‬ ‫‪) A-DEP‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪٨٢ ...‬‬ ‫‪) M‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ( ‪٨١ ...............‬‬ ‫‪) Av‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ( ‪٧٨ ..‬‬ ‫‪) Tv‬ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ‪٧٦ .... (Shutter‬‬ ‫‪) P‬ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪٥٨ ...................‬‬ ‫‪) C‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﺪﺍﻋﻲ( ‪٥٣ ........................‬‬ ‫‪) 1‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ(‪٤٤ .............................‬‬ ‫‪) 2‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ( ‪٤٧ ..........................‬‬ ‫‪) 3‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ( ‪٤٨ ............................‬‬ ‫‪) 4‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻗﺮﺏ(‪٤٩ .........................‬‬ ‫‪) 5‬ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ( ‪٥٠ .......................‬‬ ‫‪) 6‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﻟﻴﻠﻴﺔ(‪٥١ .....................‬‬ ‫‪) 7‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ( ‪٥٢ ............................‬‬ ‫‪) k‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ(‪١٢١ .........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ )ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ‪١١١ ............‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻛﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺟﻪ‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ( ‪١١٢ ...........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺒﺆﺭﺓ(‪١١٦ ..........‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ‪٨٣ ..........................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ‪١٥٧ ،١٢٣ ............................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ )‪١٢٣ ،١٢١ ............. (Full HD‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ‪١٢٣ .....................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‪١٨٢ ...............................‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﻞ ‪١٨٢ ......................................‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪١٨٣ ..........................................‬‬

‫‪٢٢٧‬‬

CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan ‫ﺍﻟﻮﻻﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﻣﺮﻛﻴﺔ‬

CANON U.S.A. INC. One Canon Plaza, Lake Success, NY 11042-1198, U.S.A. For all inquires concerning this product, call toll free in the U.S. 1800--OK-CANON

‫ﻛﻨﺪﺍ‬

CANON CANADA INC. HEADQUARTERS 6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario L5T 1P7, Canada CANON CANADA INC. MONTREAL BRANCH 5990, Côte-de-Liesse, Montréal Québec H4T 1V7, Canada CANON CANADA INC. CALGARY OFFICE 2828, 16th Street, N.E. Calgary, Alberta T2E 7K7, Canada For all inquiries concerning this product, call toll free in Canada 1800--OK-CANON

‫ﺃﻭﺭﻭﺑﺎ ﻭﺇﻓﺮﻳﻘﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻭﺳﻂ‬

CANON EUROPA N.V. Bovenkerkerweg 59-61, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands CANON FRANCE S.A.S. 17,Quai du Président Paul Doumer, 92414 Courbevoie Cedex, France CANON UK LTD. Woodhatch Reigate,Surrey RH2 8BF, United Kingdom CANON DEUTSCHLAND GmbH Europark Fichtenhain A10, 47807 Krefeld, Germany CANON ITALIA S.p.A. Via Milano 8, 20097 San Donato Milanese, (MI), Italy CANON Schweiz A.G. Industriestrasse 12, 8305 Dietlikon, Switzerland Canon GmbH Zetschegasse 11, A-1230 Vienna, Austria CANON España,S.A. Av. De Europa,6 Alcobendas 28108 Madrid, Spain CANON Portugal S.A. Rua Alfredo da Silva,14 Alfragide 2610-016 Amadora, Portugal

‫ﺃﻣﺮﻳﻜﺎ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﻄﻰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﺠﻨﻮﺑﻴﺔ‬

CANON LATIN AMERICA, INC. 703 Waterford Way, Suite 400 Miami, FL 33126,U.S.A.

‫ﺁﺳﻴﺎ‬

CANON (China) Co., LTD. 15F Jinbao Building No.89 Jinbao Street, Dongcheng District, Beijing 100005, China CANON HONGKONG CO., LTD. 19/F., The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive, Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong CANON SINGAPORE PTE. LTD. 1 HarbourFront Avenue, #04-01 Keppel Bay Tower, Singapore 098632 CANON KOREA CONSUMER IMAGING INC. Gangnam Finance Center 17F, 737,Yeoksam-Dong, Gangnam-Gu, Seoul, 135-984, Korea

‫ﺃﻭﻗﻴﺎﻧﻮﺳﻴﺎ‬

CANON AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD. 1 Thomas Holt Drive, North Ryde, Sydney N.S.W. 2113, Australia CANON NEW ZEALAND LTD. Akoranga Business Park, Akoranga Drive, Northcote, Auckland, New Zealand

‫ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬

CANON MARKETING JAPAN INC. 16-6, Kohnan 2-chome, Minato-ku, Tokyo 108-8011, Japan

‫ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺃﻳﺔ‬.٢٠٠٩ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻛﺘﻴﺐ "ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺭﺷﺎﺩﺍﺕ" ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺑﺮﻳﻞ‬ .Canon ‫ ﺍﺗﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﺣﺪ ﻣﺮﺍﻛﺰ ﺧﺪﻣﺔ‬،‫ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﻢ ﻃﺮﺣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬

CT1-1030-000

CANON ‫ ﻟﺼﺎﻟﺢ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ‬٢٠٠٩ ‫ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﺸﺮ © ﻟﻌﺎﻡ‬

‫ﻃﺒﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺎﺑﺎﻥ‬